ML11335A148: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
 
(StriderTol Bot change)
 
(7 intermediate revisions by the same user not shown)
Line 2: Line 2:
| number = ML11335A148
| number = ML11335A148
| issue date = 11/29/2011
| issue date = 11/29/2011
| title = Catawba Nuclear Station, Units 1 and 2 - Technical Specification Bases Changes
| title = Technical Specification Bases Changes
| author name = Morris J R
| author name = Morris J
| author affiliation = Duke Energy Corp
| author affiliation = Duke Energy Corp
| addressee name =  
| addressee name =  
Line 13: Line 13:
| page count = 105
| page count = 105
}}
}}
=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:Duke Energy@
November 29, 2011 U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Document Control Desk Washington, DC 20555-0001 DUKE ENERGY CORPORATION Catawba Nuclear Station 4800 Concord Rd.
York, SC 29745
==Subject:==
Duke Energy Carolinas, LLC Catawba Nuclear Station, Units 1 and 2 Docket Nos. 50-413 and 50-414 Technical Specification Bases Changes Pursuant to 10CFR 50.4, please find attached changes to the Catawba Nuclear Station Technical Specification Bases. These Bases changes were made according to the provisions of 10CFR 50.59.
Any questions regarding this information should be directed to L. J. Rudy, Regulatory Compliance, at (803)701-3084.
I certify that I am a duly authorized officer of Duke Energy Corporation and that the information contained herein accurately represents changes made to the Technical Specification Bases since the previous submittal.
James R. Morris Attachment
ý.00(
www. duke-energy. corn
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission November 29, 2011 Page 2 xc:
V. M. McCree, Regional Administrator U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Region II Marquis One Tower 245 Peachtree Center Ave., NE Suite 1200 Atlanta, GA 30303-1257 J. H. Thompson NRC Project Manager (CNS)
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission One White Flint North, Mail Stop 8-G9A 11555 Rockville Pike Rockville, MD 20852-2738 G. A. Hutto, Senior Resident Inspector Catawba Nuclear Station
Duke DUKE ENERGY CORPORATION D k Catawba Nuclear Station rokEnergy.
4800 Concord Rd.
York, SC 29745 November 22, 2011 Re:
Catawba Nuclear Station Technical Specifications Bases Please replace the corresponding pages in your copy of the Catawba Technical Specifications Manual as follows:
REMOVE THESE PAGES INSERT THESE PAGES LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES Entire Section (19 pages)
Entire Section (19 pages)
TAB 3.3.1 B 3.3.1-1 thru B 3.3.1-55 Revision 6 B 3.3.1-1 thru B 3.3.1-55 Revision 7 TAB 3.7.8 B 3.7.8-1 thru B 3.7.8-7 Revision 3 B 3.7.8-1 thru B 3.7.8-7 Revision 4 TAB 3.7.10 B 3.7.10-1 thru B 3.7.10-9 Revision 9 B 3.7.10-1 thru B 3.7.10-9 Revision 10 TAB 3.7.11 B 3.7.11-1 thru B 3.7.11-4 Revision 2 B 3.7.11-1 thru B 3.7.11-4 Revision 3 www. duke-energy. corn
TAB 3.7.12 B 3.7.12-1 thru B 3.7.12-7 Revision 4 B 3.7.12-1 thru B 3.7.12-7 Revision 5 If you have any questions concerning the contents of this Technical Specification update, contact Kristi Byers at (803)701-3758.
Randy Hart Manager, Regulatory Compliance
Catawba Nuclear Station Technical Specifications List of Effective Pages Page Number iviii iv 1.1-1 1.1-2 1.1-3 1.1-4 1.1-5 1.1-6 1.1.7 1.2-1 1.2-2 1.2-3 1.3-1 1.3-2 1.3-3 1.3-4 1.3-5 1.3-6 1.3-7 1.3-8 1.3-9 1.3-10 1.3-11 1.3-12 1.3-13 1.4-1 1.4-2 Amendment 177/169 219/214 215/209 173/165 173/165 173/165 197/190 258/253 257/252 263/259 179/171 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 Revision Date 4/08/99 3/01/05 6/21/04 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 4/22/02 8/02/10 6/28/10 3/29/11 8/13/99 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 1 11/17/111
1.4-3 1.4-4 2.0-1 3.0-1 3.0-2 3.0-3 3.0-4 3.0-5 3.0-6 3.1.1-1 3.1.2-1 3.1.2-2 3.1.3-1 3.1.3-2 3.1.3-3 3.1.4-1 3.1.4-2 3.1.4-3 3.1.4-4 3.1.5-1 3.1.5-2 3.1.6-1 3.1.6-2 3.1.6-3 3.1.7-1 3.1.7-2 3.1.8-1 3.1.8-2 3.2.1-1 3.2.1-2 3.2.1-3 3.2.1-4 173/165 173/165 210/204 235/231 235/231 235/231 235/231 235/231 235/231 263/259 173/165 263/259 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 263/259 263/259 173/165 263/259 173/165 173/165 263/259 173/165 173/165 173/165 263/259 173/165 173/165 263/259 263/259 9/30/98 9/30/98 12/19/03 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 2 11/17/11
3.2.1-5 3.2.2-1 3.2.2-2 3.2.2-3 3.2.2-4 3.2.3-1 3.2.4-1 3.2.4-2 3.2.4-3 3.2.4-4 3.3.1-1 3.3.1-2 3.3.1-3 3.3.1-4 3.3.1-5 3.3.1-6 3.3.1-7 3.3.1-8 3.3.1-9 3.3.1-10 3.3.1-11 3.3.1-12 3.3.1-13 3.3.1-14 3.3.1-15 3.3.1-16 3.3.1-17 3.3.1-18 3.3.1-19 3.3.1-20 3.3.1-21 3.3.1-22 3.3.2-1 263/259 173/165 173/165 263/259 263/259 263/259 173/165 173/165 173/165 263/259 173/165 247/240 247/240 207/201 247/240 247/240 247/240 173/165 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 173/165 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 12/30/08 12/30/08 7/29/03 12/30/08 12/30/08 12/30/08 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/30/98 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 3 11/17/111
3.3.2-2 3.3.2-3 3.3.2-4 3.3.2-5 3.3.2-6 3.3.2-7 3.3.2-8 3.3.2-9 3.3.2-10 3.3.2-11 3.3.2-12 3.3.2-13 3.3.2-14 3.3.2-15 3.3.2-16 3.3.2-17 3.3.3-1 3.3.3-2 3.3.3-3 3.3.3-4 3.3.4-1 3.3.4-2 3.3.4-3 3.3.5-1 3.3.5-2 3.3.6-1 3.3.6-2 3.3.6-3 3.3.9-1 3.3.9-2 3.3.9-3 3.3.9-4 247/240 247/240 247/240 264/260 264/260 249/243 249/243 249/243 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 264/260 263/259 219/214 219/214 263/259 219/214 213/207 263/259 173/165 173/165 263/259 196/189 263/259 196/189 207/201 207/201 263/259 263/259 12/30/08 12/30/08 12/30/08 6/13/11 6/13/11 4/2/09 4/2/09 4/2/09 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 6/13/11 3/29/11 3/1/05 3/1/05 3/29/11 3/1/05 4/29/04 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/20/02 3/29/11 3/20/02 7/29/03 7/29/03 3/29/11 3/29/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 4 11/17/11
3.4.1-1 3.4.1-2 3.4.1-3 3.4.1-4 3.4.1-5 3.4.1-6 (deleted)
(deleted) 3.4.2-1 3.4.3-1 3.4.3-2 3.4.3-3 3.4.3-4 3.4.3-5 3.4.3-6 3.4.4-1 3.4.5-1 3.4.5-2 3.4.5-3 3.4.6-1 3.4.6-2 3.4.6-3 3.4.7-1 3.4.7-2 3.4.7-3 3.4.8-1 3.4.8-2 3.4.9-1 3.4.9-2 3.4.10-1 3.4.10-2 3.4-11-1 3.4.11-2 3.4.11-3 210/204 210/204 263/259 210/204 184/176 184/176 173/165 173/165 263/259 212/206 212/206 212/206 212/206 263/259 207/201 207/201 263/259 212/206 263/259 263/259 212/206 263/259 263/259 207/201 263/259 173/165 263/259 212/206 173/165 213/207 173/165 263/259 12/19/03 12/19/03 3/29/11 12/19/03 3/01/00 3/01/00 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/4/04 3/4/04 3/4/04 3/4/04 3/29/11 7/29/03 7/29/03 3/29/11 3/4/04 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/4/04 3/29/11 3/29/11 7/29/03 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/4/04 9/30/98 4/29/04 9/30/98 3/29/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 5 11/17/11
3.4.11-4 3.4.12-1 3.4.12-2 3.4.12-3 3.4.12-4 3.4.12-5 3.4.12-6 3.4.12-7 3.4.12-8 3.4.13-1 3.4.13-2 3.4.14-1 3.4.14-2 3.4.14-3 3.4.14-4 3.4.15-1 3.4.15-2 3.4.15-3 3.4.15-4 3.4.16-1 3.4.16-2 3.4.16-3 3.4.16-4 3.4.17-1 3.4.18-1 3.4.18-2 3.5.1-1 3.5.1-2 3.5.1-3 3.5.2-1 3.5.2-2 3.5.2-3 263/259 212/206 213/207 212/206 212/206 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 218/212 263/259 173/165 173/165 263/259 263/259 234/230 234/230 234/230 263/259 213/207 263/259 263/259 173/165 263/259 218/212 218/212 211/205 263/259 263/259 253/248 263/259 263/259 3/29/11 3/4/04 4/29/04 3/4/04 3/4/04 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 1/13/05 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/30/06 9/30/06 9/30/06 3/29/11 4/29/04 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 1/13/05 1/13/05 12/23/03 3/29/11 3/29/11 10/30/09 3/29/11 3/29/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 6 11/17/11
3.5.3-1 3.5.3-2 3.5.4-1 3.5.4-2 3.5.5-1 3.5.5-2 3.6.1-1 3.6.1-2 3.6.2-1 3.6.2-2 3.6.2-3 3.6.2-4 3.6.2-5 3.6.3-1 3.6.3-2 3.6.3-3 3.6.3-4 3.6.3-5 3.6.3-6 3.6.3-7 3.6.4-1 3.6.5-1 3.6.5-2 3.6.6-1 3.6.6-2 3.6.8-1 3.6.8-2 3.6.9-1 3.6.9-2 3.6.10-1 3.6.10-2 3.6.11-1 213/207 173/165 173/165 263/259 173/165 263/259 173/165 192/184 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 263/259 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 263/259 263/259 192/184 263/259 173/165 263/259 263/259 263/259 213/207 263/259 253/248 263/259 173/165 263/259 263/259 4/29/04 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 7/31/01 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 7/31/01 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 4/29/04 3/29/11 10/30/09 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 7 11/17/11
3.6.11-2 3.6.12-1 3.6.12-2 3.6.12-3 3.6.13-1 3.6.13-2 3.6.13-3 3.6.14-1 3.6.14-2 3.6.14-3 3.6.15-1 3.6.15-2 3.6.16-1 3.6.16-2 3.6.17-1 3.7.1-1 3.7.1-2 3.7.1-3 3.7.2-1 3.7.2-2 3.7.3-1 3.7.3-2 3.7.4-1 3.7.4-2 3.7.5-1 3.7.5-2 3.7.5-3 3.7.5-4 3.7.6-1 3.7.6-2 3.7.7-1 3.7.7-2 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 256/251 263/259 263/259 173/165 263/259 263/259 173/165 263/259 263/259 263/259 253/248 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 244/238 173/165 244/238 213/207 263/259 253/248 173/165 263/259 263/259 173/165 263/259 253/248 263/259 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 6/28/10 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 10/30/09 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/08/08 9/30/98 9/08/08 4/29/04 3/29/11 10/30/09 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 10/30/09 3/29/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 8 11/17/11
3.7.8-1 3.7.8-2 3.7.8-3 3.7.9-1 3.7.9-2 3.7.10-1 3.7.10-2 3.7.10-3 3.7.11-1 3.7.11-2 3.7.12-1 3.7.12-2 3.7.13-1 3.7.13-2 3.7.14-1 3.7.15-1 3.7.16-1 3.7.16-2 3.7.16-3 3.7.17-1 3.8.1-1 3.8.1-2 3.8.1-3 3.8.1-4 3.8.1-5 3.8.1-6 3.8.1-7 3.8.1-8 3.8.1-9 3.8.1-10 3.8.1-11 3.8.1-12 243/237 243/237 263/259 263/259 263/259 250/245 260/255 263/259 198/191 263/259 253/248 263/259 198/191 263/259 263/259 263/259 233/229 233/229 233/229 263/259 253/248 173/165 253/248 173/165 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 07/30/08 07/30/08 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 7/30/09 8/9/10 3/29/11 4/23/02 3/29/11 10/30/09 3/29/11 4/23/02 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/27/06 9/27/06 9/27/06 3/29/11 10/30/09 9/30/98 10/30/09 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 9 11/17/11
3.8.1-13 3.8.1-14 3.8.1-15 3.8.2-1 3.8.2-2 3.8.2-3 3.8.3-1 3.8.3-2 3.8.3-3 3.8.4-1 3.8.4-2 3.8.4-3 3.8.4-4 3.8.4-5 3.8.5-1 3.8.5-2 3.8.6-1 3.8.6-2 3.8.6-3 3.8.6-4 3.8.6-5 3.8.7-1 3.8.7-2 3.8.8-1 3.8.8-2 3.8.9-1 3.8.9-2 3.8.9-3 3.8.10-1 3.8.10-2 3.9.1-1 3.9.2-1 263/259 263/259 263/259 173/165 207/201 173/165 175/167 263/259 263/259 173/165 263/259 263/259 263/259 262/258 173/165 207/201 253/248 253/248 253/248 263/259 223/218 173/165 263/259 173/165 263/259 173/165 173/165 263/259 207/201 263/259 263/259 215/209 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/30/98 7/29/03 9/30/98 1/15/99 3/29111 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 12/20/10 9/30/98 7/29/03 10/30/09 10/30/09 10/30/09 3/29/11 4/27/05 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 7/29/03 3/29/11 3/29/11 6/21/04 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 10 11/17/11
3.9.2-2 3.9.3-1 3.9.3-2 3.9.4-1 3.9.4-2 3.9.5-1 3.9.5-2 3.9.6-1 3.9.7-1 4.0-1 4.0-2 5.1-1 5.2-1 5.2-2 5.2-3 5.3-1 5.4-1 5.5-1 5.5-2 5.5-3 5.5-4 5.5-5 5.5-6 5.5-7 5.5-7a 5.5-8 5.5-9 5.5-10 5.5-11 5.5-12 5.5-13 5.5-14 263/259 227/222 263/259 207/201 263/259 207/201 263/259 263/259 263/259 220/215 233/229 173/165 253/248 251/246 Deleted 181/173 173/165 205/198 205/198 173/165 173/165 216/210 252/247 218/212
---/257
---/257 218/212 227/222 227/222 218/212 218/212 218/212 3/29/11 9/30/05 3/29/11 7/29/03 3/29/11 7/29/03 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/03/05 9/27/06 9/30/98 10/30/09 9/21/09 9/21/09 11/02/99 9/30/98 3/12/03 3/12/03 9/30/98 9/30/98 8/5/04 10/30/09 1/13/05 9/27/10 9/27/10 1/13/05 9/30/05 9/30/05 1/13/05 1/13/05 1/13/05 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 11 11/17/11
5.5-15 5.5-16 5.6-1 5.6-2 5.6-3 5.6-4 5.6-5 5.6-6 5.7-1 5.7-2 263/259 263/259 222/217 253/248 222/217 222/217
---/257
---/257 173/165 173/165 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/31/05 10/30/09 3/31/05 3/31/05 9/27/10 4/13/09 9/30/98 9/30/98 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 12
..11/17/11
ii iii B 2.1.1-1 B 2.1.1-2 B 2.1.1-3 B 2.1.2-1 B 2.1.2-2 B 2.1.2-3 B 3.0-1 B 3.0-2 B 3.0-3 B 3.0-4 B 3.0-5 B 3.0-6 B 3.0-7 B 3.0-8 B 3.0-9 B 3.0-10 B 3.0-11 B 3.0-12 B 3.0-13 B 3.0-14 B 3.0-15 B 3.0-16 B 3.0-17 B 3.0-18 B 3.0-19 B 3.1.1-1 thru B 3.1.1-6 BASES Revision 1 Revision 2 Revision 1 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 1 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 1 Revision 2 Revision 3 Revision 3 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 3 Revision 2 Revision 3 Revision 3 Revision 3 Revision 3 Revision 3 Revision 1 Revision 1 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 3 4/08/99 3/01/05 6/21/04 9/30/98 12/19/03 12/19/03 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 5/05/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 13 10/24/11
B 3.1.2-1 thru B 3.1.2-5 B 3.1.3-1 thru B 3.1.3-6 B 3.1.4-1 thru B 3.1.4-9 B 3.1.5-1 thru B 3.1.5-4 B 3.1.6-1 thru B 3.1.6-6 B 3.1.7-1 B 3.1.7-2 B 3.1.7-3 B 3.1.7-4 B 3.1.7-5 B 3.1.7-6 B 3.1.8-1 thru B 3.1.8-6 B 3.2.1-1 thru B 3.2.1.-11 B 3.2.2-1 thru B 3.2.2-10 B 3.2.3-1 thru B 3.2.3-4 B 3.2.4-1 thru B 3.2.4-7 B 3.3.1-1 thru B.3.3.1-55 B 3.3.2-1 thru B 3.3.2-49 B 3.3.3-1 thru B.3.3.3-16 B 3.3.4-1 thru B 3.3.4-5 Revision 2 Revision 1 Revision 1 Revision 2 Revision 1 Revision 0 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 4 Revision 3 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 7 Revision 10 Revision 4 Revision 2 5/05/11 4/26/00 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 9/30/98 1/08/04 1/08/04 1/08/04 1/08/04 1/08/04 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 10/24/11 6/13/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page.14 10/24/11
B 3.3.5-1 thru B 3.3.5-6 B 3.3.6-1 thru B 3.3.6-5 B 3.3.9-1 thru B 3.3.9-5 B 3.4.1-1 thru B 3.4.1-5 B 3.4.2-1 thru B 3.4.2-3 B 3.4.3-1 thru B 3.4.3-6 B 3.4.4-1 thru B 3.4.4-3 B 3.4.5-1 thru B 3.4.5-6 B 3.4.6-1 thru B 3.4.6-5 B 3.4.7-1 thru B 3.4.7-5 B 3.4.8-1 thru B 3.4.8-3 B 3.4.9-1 thru B 3.4.9-4 B 3.4.10-1 B 3.4.10-2 B 3.4.10-3 B 3.4.10-4 B 3.4.11-1 thru B 3.4.11-7 B 3.4.12-1 thru B 3.4.12-13 B 3.4.13-1 thru B 3.4.13-7 B 3.4.14-1 thru B 3.4.14-6 B 3.4.15-1 thru B 3.4.15-10 B 3.4.16-1 thru B 3.4.16-6 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Revision 2 Revision 5 Revision 2 Revision 3 Revision 0 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 3 Revision 4 Revision 5 Revision 3 Revision 2 Revision 1 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 2 Revision 4 Revision 4 Revision 6 Revision 3 Revision 6 Revision 3 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 9/30/98 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 3/4/04 9/30/98 3/4/04 10/30/09 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 Page 15 10/24/11
B 3.4.17-1 thru B 3.4.17-3 B 3.4.18-1 B 3.4.18-2 B 3.4.18-3 B 3.4.18-4 B 3.4.18-5 B 3.4.18-6 B 3.4.18-7 B 3.4.18-8 B 3.5.1-1 thru B 3.5.1-8 B 3.5.2-1 thru B 3.5.2-10 B 3.5.3-1 B 3.5.3-2 B 3.5.3-3 B 3.5.4-1 thru B.3.5.4-6 B 3.5.5-1 thru B 3.5.5-4 B 3.6.1-1 thru B 3.6.1-5 B 3.6.2-1 thru B 3.6.2-8 B 3.6.3-1 thru B 3.6.3-14 B 3.6.4-1 thru B 3.6.4-4 B 3.6.5-1 thru B 3.6.5-4 B 3.6.6-1 thru B 3.6.6-7 B 3.6.8-1 thru B 3.6.8-5 B 3.6.9-1 thru B 3.6.9-5 Revision 2 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 3 Revision 3 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 1 Revision 4 Revision 1 Revision 1 Revision 2 Revision 4 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 6 Revision 3 Revision 6 5/05/11 1/13/05 1/13/05 3/18/08 1/13/05 1/13/05 1/13/05 1/13/05 3/18/08 5/05/11 5/05/11 9/30/98 4/29/04 4/29/04 5/05/11 5/05/11 7/31/01 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05111 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 16 10/24/1 1
B 3.6.10-1 thru B 3.6.10-6 B 3.6.11-1 thru B 3.6.11-6 B 3.6.12-1 thru B 3.6.12-11 B 3.6.13-1 thru B 3.6.13-9 B 3.6.14-1 thru B 3.6.14-5 B 3.6.15-1 thru B 3.6.15-4 B 3.6.16-1 thru B 3.6.16-4 B 3.6.17-1 B 3.6.17-2 B 3.6.17-3 B 3.6.17-4 B 3.6.17-5 B 3.7.1-1 B 3.7.1-2 B 3.7.1-3 B 3.7.1-4 B 3.7.1-5 B 3.7.2-1 B 3.7.2-2 B 3.7.2-3 B 3.7.2-4 B 3.7.2-5 B 3.7.3-1 B 3.7.3-2 B 3.7.3-3 B 3.7.3-4 B 3.7.3-5 B 3.7.3-6 Revision 2 Revision 5 Revision 5 Revision 4 Revision 1 Revision 1 Revision 3 Revision 1 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 1 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 2 Revision 1 Revision 3 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 2 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 3/13/08 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/13/08 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 10/30/09 10/30/09 9/30/98 9/30/98 6/23/10 9/08/08 10/30/09 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/08/08 10/30/09 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 17 10/24/11
B 3.7.4-1 thru B 3.7.4-4 B 3.7.5-1 thru B 3.7.5-9 B 3.7.6-1 thru B 3.7.6-3 B 3.7.7-1 thru B 3.7.7-5 B 3.7.8-1 thru B 3.7.8-7 B 3.7.9-1 thru B 3.7.9-4 B 3.7.10-1 thru B 3.7.10-9 B 3.7.11-1 thru B 3.7.11-4 B 3.7.12-1 thru B 3.7.12-7 B 3.7.13-1 thru B 3.7.13-5 B 3.7.14-1 thru B 3.7.14-3 B 3.7.15-1 thru B 3.7.15-4 B 3.7.16-1 B 3.7.16-2 B 3.7.16-3 B 3.7.16-4 B 3.7.17-1 thru B 3.7.17-3 B 3.8.1-1 thru B.3.8.1-29 B 3.8.2-1 B 3.8.2-2 B 3.8.2-3 B 3.8.2-4 B 3.8.2-5 B 3.8.2-6 Revision 2 Revision 3 Revision 3 Revision 2 Revision 4 Revision 3 Revision 10 Revision 3 Revision 5 Revision 4 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 0 Revision 2 Revision 4 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 2 Revision 1 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 10/24/11 5/05/11 10/24/11 10/24/11 10/24/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 9/27/06 9/27/06 9/27/06 9/27/06 5/05/11 5/05/11 9/30/98 9130/98 9/30/98 5/10/05 5/10/05 5/10/05 I
Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 18 10/24/11
B 3.8.3-1 thru B 3.8.3-8 B 3.8.4-1 thru B3.8.4. 10 B 3.8.5-1 B 3.8.5-2 B 3.8.5-3 B 3.8.6-1 thru B 3.8.6-7 B 3.8.7-1 thru B 3.8.7-4 B 3.8.8-1 thru B 3.8.8-4 B 3.8.9-1 thru B 3.8.9-10 B 3.8.10-1 thru B 3.8.10-4 B 3.9.1-1 thru B 3.9.1-4 B 3.9.2-1 thru B 3.9.2.4 B 3.9.3-1 thru B 3.9.3-5 B 3.9.4-1 thru B 3.9.4-4 B 3.9.5-1 thru B 3.9.5-4 B 3.9.6-1 thru B 3.9.6-3 B 3.9.7-1 thru B 3.9.7-3 Revision 4 Revision 10 Revision 0 Revision 2 Revision 1 Revision 4 Revision 3 Revision 3 Revision 2 Revision 3 Revision 3 Revision 4 Revision 4 Revision 4 Revision 3 Revision 2 Revision 1 5/05/11 5/05/11 9/30/98 7/29/03 7/29/03 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 19 10/24/11
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 B 3.3 INSTRUMENTATION B 3.3.1 Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation BASES BACKGROUND The RTS initiates a unit shutdown, based on the values of selected unit parameters, to protect against violating the core fuel design limits and Reactor Coolant System (RCS) pressure boundary during anticipated operational occurrences (AOOs) and to assist the Engineered Safety Features (ESF) Systems in mitigating accidents.
The protection and monitoring systems have been designed to assure safe operation of the reactor. This is achieved by specifying limiting safety system settings (LSSS) in terms of parameters directly monitored by the RTS, as well as specifying LCOs on other reactor system parameters and equipment performance.
The LSSS, defined in this specification as the Allowable Value, in conjunction with the LCOs, establish the threshold for protective system action to prevent exceeding acceptable limits during Design Basis Accidents (DBAs).
During AOOs, which are those events expected to occur one or more times during the unit life, the acceptable limits are:
: 1.
The Departure from Nucleate Boiling Ratio (DNBR) shall be maintained above the Safety Limit (SL) value to prevent departure from nucleate boiling (DNB);
: 2.
Fuel centerline melt shall not occur; and
: 3.
The RCS pressure SL of 2735 psig shall not be exceeded.
Operation within the SLs of Specification 2.0, "Safety Limits (SLs)," also maintains the above values and assures that offsite dose will be within the 10 CFR 20 and 10 CFR 50.67 criteria during AOOs.
Accidents are events that are analyzed even though they are not expected to occur during the unit life. The acceptable limit during accidents is that offsite dose shall be maintained within an acceptable fraction of 10 CFR 50.67 limits. Different accident categories are allowed a different fraction of these limits, based on probability of occurrence.
Meeting the acceptable dose limit for an accident category is considered having acceptable consequences for that event.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1 -1 Revision No-7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES BACKGROUND (continued)
The RTS instrumentation is segmented into four distinct but interconnected categories as illustrated in UFSAR, Chapter 7 (Ref. 1),
and as identified below:
: 1.
Field transmitters or process sensors: provide a measurable electronic signal based upon the physical characteristics of the parameter being measured;
: 2.
Process monitoring systems, including the Process Control System, the Nuclear Instrumentation System (NIS), and various field contacts and sensors: monitors various plant parameters, provides any required signal processing, and provides digital outputs when parameters exceed predetermined limits. They may also provide outputs for control, indication, alarm, computer input, and recording;
: 3.
Solid State Protection System (SSPS), including input, logic, and output bays: combines the input signals from the process monitoring systems per predetermined logic and initiates a reactor trip and ESF actuation when warranted by the process monitoring systems inputs; and
: 4.
Reactor trip switchgear, including reactor trip breakers (RTBs) and bypass breakers: provides the means to interrupt power to the control rod drive mechanisms (CRDMs) and allows the rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs), or "rods," to fall into the core and shut down the reactor. The bypass breakers allow testing of the RTBs at power.
Field Transmitters or Sensors To meet the design demands for redundancy and reliability, more than one, and often as many as four, field transmitters or sensors are used to measure unit parameters. To account for the calibration tolerances and instrument drift, which are assumed to occur between calibrations, statistical allowances are provided in the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT.
The OPERABILITY of each transmitter or sensor can be evaluated when its "as found" calibration data are compared against its documented acceptance criteria.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-2 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES BACKGROUND (continued)
Process Monitoring Systems Generally, three or four channels of process control equipment are used for the signal processing of unit parameters measured by the field instruments. The process control equipment provides signal conditioning, compatible output signals for instruments located on the main control board, and comparison of measured input signals with setpoints established by safety analyses. These setpoints are defined in UFSAR, Chapter 7 (Ref. 1), Chapter 6 (Ref. 2), and Chapter 15 (Ref. 3). If the measured value of a unit parameter exceeds the predetermined setpoint, an output from a bistable is forwarded to the SSPS for decision logic processing. Channel separation is maintained up to and through the input bays. However, not all unit parameters require four channels of sensor measurement and signal processing. Some unit parameters provide input only to the SSPS, while others provide input to the SSPS, the main control board, the unit computer, and one or more control systems.
Generally, if a parameter is used only for input to the protection circuits, three channels with a two-out-of-three logic are sufficient to provide the required reliability and redundancy. If one channel fails in a direction that would not result in a partial Function trip, the Function is still OPERABLE with a two-out-of-two logic. If one channel fails, such that a partial Function trip occurs, a trip will not occur and the Function is still OPERABLE with a one-out-of-two logic.
Generally, if a parameter is used for input to the SSPS and a control function, four channels with a two-out-of-four logic are sufficient to, provide the required reliability and redundancy. The circuit must be able to withstand both an input failure to the control system, which may then require the protection function actuation, and a single failure in the other channels providing the protection function actuation. Again, a single failure will neither cause nor prevent the protection function actuation.
These requirements are described in IEEE-279-1971 (Ref. 4). The actual number of channels required for each unit parameter is specified in Reference 1.
Two logic channels are required to ensure no single random failure of a logic channel will disable the RTS. The logic channels are designed such that testing required while the reactor is at power may be accomplished without causing a trip. Provisions to allow removing logic channels from service during maintenance are unnecessary because of the logic system's designed reliability.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.31-3 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES BACKGROUND (continued)
Trip Setpoints and Allowable Values The NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINTS are the nominal values at which the bistables are set. Any bistable is considered to be properly adjusted when the "as left" value is within the band for CHANNEL CALIBRATION tolerance.
The NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINTS used in the bistables are based on the analytical limits (Ref. 1, 2, and 3). The selection of these NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINTS is such that adequate protection is provided when all sensor and processing time delays, calibration tolerances, instrumentation uncertainties, instrument drift, and severe environment errors for those RTS channels that must function in harsh environments as defined by 10 CFR 50.49 (Ref. 5) are taken into account. The actual as-left setpoint of the bistable assures that the actual trip occurs in time to prevent an analytical limit from being exceeded.
The Allowable Value accounts for changes in random measurement errors between COTs. One example of such a change in measurement error is drift during the surveillance interval. If the COT demonstrates that the loop trips within the Allowable Value, the loop is OPERABLE. A trip within the Allowable Value ensures that the predictions of equipment performance used to develop the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT are still valid, and that the equipment will initiate a trip in response to an AOO in time to prevent an analytical limit from being exceeded (and that the consequences of DBAs will be acceptable, providing the unit is operated from within the LCOs at the onset of the AOO or DBA and the equipment functions as designed). Note that in the accompanying LCO 3.3.1, the Allowable Values of Table 3.3.1-1 are the LSSS.
Each channel of the process control equipment can be tested on line to verify that the signal or setpoint accuracy is within the specified allowance requirements. Once a designated channel is taken out of service for testing, a simulated signal is injected in place of the field instrument signal. The process equipment for the channel in test is then tested, verified, and calibrated. SRs for the channels are specified in the SRs section.
The determination of the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINTS and Allowable Values listed in Table 3.3.1-1 incorporates all of the known uncertainties applicable for each channel. The magnitudes of these uncertainties are factored into the determination of each NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT. All field sensors and signal processing equipment Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-4 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES BACKGROUND (continued) for these channels are assumed to operate within the allowances of these uncertainty magnitudes.
Solid State Protection System
-T-heSSPS equipment is used for the decision logic processing of outputs from the signal processing equipment bistables. To meet the redundancy requirements, two trains of SSPS, each performing the same functions, are provided. If one train is taken out of service for maintenance or test purposes, the second train will provide reactor trip and/or ESF actuation for the unit. If both trains are taken out of service or placed in test, a reactor trip will result. Each train is packaged in its own cabinet for physical and electrical separation to satisfy separation and independence requirements. The system has been designed to trip the reactor in the event of a loss of power, directing the unit to a safe shutdown condition.
The SSPS performs the decision logic for actuating a reactor trip or ESF actuation, generates the electrical output signal that will initiate the required trip or actuation, and provides the status, permissive, and annunciator output signals to the main control room of the unit.
The outputs from the process monitoring systems are sensed by the SSPS equipment and combined into logic matrices that represent combinations indicative of various unit upset and accident transients. If a logic matrix combination is completed, the system will initiate a reactor trip or send actuation signals via master and slave relays to those components whose aggregate Function best serves to alleviate the condition and restore the unit to a stable condition. Examples are given in the Applicable Safety Analyses, LCO, and Applicability sections of this Bases.
Reactor Trip Switchqear The RTBs are in the electrical power supply line from the control rod drive motor generator set power supply to the CRDMs. Opening of the RTBs interrupts power to the CRDMs, which allows the shutdown rods and control rods to fall into the core by gravity. Each RTB is equipped with a bypass breaker to allow testing of the RTB while the unit is at power.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-5 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES BACKGROUND (continued)
During normal operation the output from the SSPS is a voltage signal that energizes the undervoltage coils in the RTBs and bypass breakers, if in use. When the required logic matrix combination is completed, the SSPS output voltage signal is removed, the undervoltage coils are de-energized, the breaker trip lever is actuated by a compressed spring that is released by de-energizing the undervoltage coil, and the RTBs and bypass breakers are tripped open. This allows the shutdown rods and control rods to fall into the core. In addition to the de-energization of the undervoltage coils, each breaker is also equipped with a shunt trip device that is energized to trip the breaker open upon receipt of a reactor trip signal from the SSPS. Either the undervoltage coil or the shunt trip mechanism is sufficient by itself, thus providing a diverse trip mechanism.
The decision logic matrix Functions are described in the functional diagrams included in Reference 1. In addition to the reactor trip or ESF, these diagrams also describe the various "permissive interlocks" that are associated with unit conditions. Each train has a built in testing device that can test the decision logic matrix Functions and the actuation devices while the unit is at power. When any one train is taken out of service for testing, the other train is capable of providing unit monitoring and protection until the testing has been completed. The testing device is semiautomatic to minimize testing time.
APPLICABLE The RTS functions to maintain the SLs during all AOOs and mitigates SAFETY ANALYSES, the consequences of DBAs in all MODES in which the RTBs are closed.
LCO, and APPLICABILITY Each of the analyzed accidents and transients can be detected by one or more RTS Functions. The accident analysis described in Reference 3 takes credit for most RTS trip Functions. RTS trip Functions not specifically credited in the accident analysis are qualitatively credited in the safety analysis and the NRC staff approved licensing basis for the unit. These RTS trip Functions may provide protection for conditions that do not require dynamic transient analysis to demonstrate Function performance. They may also serve as backups to RTS trip Functions that were credited in the accident analysis.
The LCO requires all instrumentation performing an RTS Function, listed in Table 3.3.1-1 in the accompanying LCO, to be OPERABLE. Failure of any instrument renders the affected channel(s) inoperable and reduces the reliability of the affected Functions.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 8 3.3.1-6 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, AND APPLICABILITY (continued)
The LCO generally requires OPERABILITY of three or four channels in each instrumentation Function, two channels of Manual Reactor Trip in each logic Function, and two trains in each Automatic Trip Logic Function. Four OPERABLE instrumentation channels in a two-out-of-four configuration are required when one RTS channel is also used as a control system input. This configuration accounts for the possibility of the shared channel failing in such a manner that it creates a transient that requires RTS action.- In this case, the RTS will still provide protection, even with random failure of one of the other three protection channels.
Three operable instrumentation channels in a two-out-of-three configuration are generally required when there is no potential for control system and protection system interaction that could simultaneously create a need for RTS trip and disable one RTS channel. The two-out-of-three and two-out-of-four configurations allow one channel to be tripped during maintenance or testing without causing a reactor trip. Specific exceptions to the above general philosophy exist and are discussed below.
Reactor Trip System Functions The safety analyses and OPERABILITY requirements applicable to each RTS Function are discussed below:
: 1.
Manual Reactor Trip The Manual Reactor Trip ensures that the control room operator can initiate a reactor trip at any time by using either of two reactor trip switches in the control room. A Manual Reactor Trip accomplishes the same results as any one of the automatic trip Functions. It may be used by the reactor operator to shut down the reactor whenever any parameter is rapidly trending toward its Trip Setpoint.
The LCO requires two Manual Reactor Trip channels to be OPERABLE. Each channel is controlled by a manual reactor trip switch. Each channel actuates one or more reactor trip breakers in both trains. Two independent channels are required to be OPERABLE so that no single random failure will disable the Manual Reactor Trip Function.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-7 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)
In MODE 1 or 2, manual initiation of a reactor trip must be OPERABLE. These are the MODES in which the shutdown rods and/or control rods are partially or fully withdrawn from the core. In MODE 3, 4, or 5, the manual initiation Function must also be OPERABLE if the shutdown rods or control rods are withdrawn or the Control Rod Drive (CRD) System is capable of withdrawing the shutdown rods or the control rods. In this condition, inadvertent control rod withdrawal is possible. In MODE 3, 4, or 5, manual initiation of a reactor trip does not have to be OPERABLE if the CRD System is not capable of withdrawing the shutdown rods or control rods. If the rods cannot be withdrawn from the core, there is no need to be able to trip the reactor because all of the rods are inserted. In MODE 6, the CRDMs are disconnected from the control rods and shutdown rods. Therefore, the manual initiation Function is not required.
: 2.
Power Range Neutron Flux The NIS power range detectors are located external to the reactor vessel and measure neutrons leaking from the core. The NIS power range detectors provide input to the Rod Control System and the Steam Generator (SG) Water Level Control System.
Therefore, the actuation logic must be able to withstand an input failure to the control system, which may then require the protection function actuation, and a single failure in the other channels providing the protection function actuation. Note that this Function also provides a signal to prevent automatic and manual rod withdrawal prior to initiating a reactor trip. Limiting further rod withdrawal may terminate the transient and eliminate the need to trip the reactor.
: a.
Power Range Neutron Flux-High The Power Range Neutron Flux-High trip Function ensures that protection is provided, from all power levels, against a positive reactivity excursion leading to DNB during power operations. These can be caused by rod withdrawal or reductions in RCS temperature.
The LCO requires all four of the Power Range Neutron Flux-High channels to be OPERABLE.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-8 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, AND APPLICABILITY (continued)
In MODE 1 or 2, when a positive reactivity excursion could occur, the Power Range Neutron Flux-High trip must be OPERABLE. This Function will terminate the reactivity excursion and shut down the reactor prior to reaching a power level that could damage the fuel. In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, the NIS power range detectors cannot detect neutron levels in this range. In these MODES, the Power Range Neutron Flux-High does not have to be OPERABLE because the reactor is shut down and reactivity excursions into the power range are extremely unlikely. Other RTS Functions and administrative controls provide protection against reactivity additions when in MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6.
: b.
Power Range Neutron Flux-Low The LCO requirement for the Power Range Neutron Flux-Low trip Function ensures that protection is provided against a positive reactivity excursion from low power or subcritical conditions.
The LCO requires all four of the Power Range Neutron Flux-Low channels to be OPERABLE.
In MODE 1, below the Power Range Neutron Flux (P-1 0 setpoint), and in MODE 2, the Power Range Neutron Flux-Low trip must be OPERABLE. This Function may be manually blocked by the operator when two out of four power range channels are greater than approximately 10% RTP (P-10 setpoint). This Function is automatically unblocked when three out of four power range channels are below the P-10 setpoint. Above the P-10 setpoint, positive reactivity additions are mitigated by the Power Range Neutron Flux-High trip Function.
In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, the Power Range Neutron Flux-Low trip Function does not have to be OPERABLE because the reactor is shut down and the NIS power range detectors cannot detect neutron levels in this range. Other RTS trip Functions and administrative controls provide protection Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-9 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, AND APPLICABILITY (continued) against positive reactivity additions or power excursions in MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6.
: 3.
Power Range Neutron Flux - High Positive Rate The Power Range Neutron Flux-High Positive Rate trip uses the same channels as discussed for Function 2 above.
The Power Range Neutron Flux-High Positive Rate trip Function ensures that protection is provided against rapid increases in neutron flux that are characteristic of an RCCA drive rod housing rupture and the accompanying ejection of the RCCA. This Function compliments the Power Range Neutron Flux-High and Low Setpoint trip Functions to ensure that the criteria are met for a rod ejection from the power range.
The LCO requires all four of the Power Range Neutron Flux-High Positive Rate channels to be OPERABLE.
In MODE 1 or 2, when there is a potential to add a large amount of positive reactivity from a rod ejection accident (REA), the Power Range Neutron Flux-High Positive Rate trip must be OPERABLE.
In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, the Power Range Neutron Flux-High Positive Rate trip Function does not have to be OPERABLE because other RTS trip Functions and administrative controls will provide protection against positive reactivity additions. In MODE 6, no rods are withdrawn and the SDM is increased during refueling operations. The reactor vessel head is also removed or the closure bolts are detensioned preventing any pressure buildup. In addition, the NIS power range detectors cannot detect neutron levels present in this mode.
: 4.
Intermediate Range Neutron Flux The Intermediate Range Neutron Flux trip Function ensures that protection is provided against an uncontrolled RCCA bank rod withdrawal accident from a subcritical condition during startup.
This trip Function provides redundant protection to the Power Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-10 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)
Range Neutron Flux-Low Setpoint trip Function. The NIS intermediate range detectors are located external to the reactor vessel and measure neutrons leaking from the core. Note that this Function also provides a signal to prevent automatic and manual rod withdrawal prior to initiating a reactor trip. Limiting further rod withdrawal may terminate the transient and eliminate the need to trip the reactor.
The LCO requires two channels of Intermediate Range Neutron Flux to be OPERABLE. Two OPERABLE channels are sufficient to ensure no single random failure will disable this trip Function.
Because this trip Function is important only during startup, there is generally no need to disable channels for testing while the Function is required to be OPERABLE. Therefore, a third channel is unnecessary.
In MODE 1 below the P-10 setpoint, and in MODE 2, when there is a potential for an uncontrolled RCCA bank rod withdrawal accident during reactor startup, the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux trip must be OPERABLE. Above the P-10 setpoint, the Power Range Neutron Flux-High Setpoint trip and the Power Range Neutron Flux-High Positive Rate trip provide core protection for a rod withdrawal accident. In MODE 3, 4, or 5, the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux trip does not have to be OPERABLE because other RTS trip functions provide protection against positive reactivity additions. The reactor cannot be started up in this condition. The core also has the required SDM to mitigate the consequences of a positive reactivity addition accident. In MODE 6, all rods are fully inserted and the core has a required increased SDM. Also, the NIS intermediate range detectors (Westinghouse-supplied only) cannot detect neutron levels present in this MODE.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-11 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)
: 5.
Source Range Neutron Flux The LCO requirement for the Source Range Neutron Flux trip Function ensures that protection is provided against an uncontrolled RCCA bank rod withdrawal accident from a subcritical condition during startup.
This trip Function provides redundant protection to the Power Range Neutron Flux-Low Setpoint and Intermediate Range Neutron Flux trip Functions. In MODES 3, 4, and 5, administrative controls also prevent the uncontrolled withdrawal of rods. The NIS source range detectors are located external to the reactor vessel and measure neutrons leaking from the core. The NIS source range detectors do not provide any inputs to control systems. The source range trip is the only RTS automatic protection function required in MODES 3, 4, and 5. Therefore, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available.
The LCO requires two channels of Source Range Neutron Flux to be OPERABLE. Two OPERABLE channels are sufficient to ensure no single random failure will disable this trip Function.
The Source Range Neutron Flux Function provides protection for control rod withdrawal from subcritical and control rod ejection events. The Function also provides visual neutron flux indication in the control room.
In MODE 2 when below the P-6 setpoint during a reactor startup, the Source Range Neutron Flux trip must be OPERABLE. Above the P-6 setpoint, the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux trip and the Power Range Neutron Flux-Low Setpoint trip will provide core protection for reactivity accidents. Above the P-6 setpoint, the NIS source range detectors are de-energized and inoperable (Westinghouse-supplied only). Above the P-6 setpoint, the Source Range Neutron Flux trip is blocked (Thermo Scientific-supplied only).
In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the reactor shut down, the Source Range Neutron Flux trip Function must also be OPERABLE. If the CRD System is capable of rod withdrawal, the Source Range Neutron Flux trip must be OPERABLE to provide core protection against a rod withdrawal accident. If the CRD System is not capable of rod withdrawal, the source range detectors are not required to trip the reactor.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-12 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)
: 6.
Overtemperature AT The Overtemperature AT trip Function is provided to ensure that the design limit DNBR is met. This trip Function also limits the range over which the Overpower AT trip Function must provide protection. The inputs to the Overtemperature AT trip include pressurizer pressure, coolant temperature, axial power distribution, and reactor power as indicated by loop AT assuming full reactor coolant flow. Protection from violating the DNBR limit is assured for those transients that are slow with respect to delays from the core to the measurement system. The function monitors both variation in power and flow since a decrease in flow has the same effect on AT as a power increase. The Overtemperature AT trip Function uses each loop's AT as a measure of reactor power and is compared with a setpoint that is automatically varied with the following parameters:
reactor coolant average temperature-the Trip Setpoint is varied to correct for changes in coolant density and specific heat capacity with changes in coolant temperature; pressurizer pressure-the Trip Setpoint is varied to correct for changes in system pressure; and axial power distribution-f(AI), the Trip Setpoint is varied to account for imbalances in the axial power distribution as detected by the NIS upper and lower power range detectors.
If axial peaks are greater than the design limit, as indicated by the difference between the upper and lower NIS power range detectors, the Trip Setpoint is reduced in accordance with Note 1 of Table 3.3.1-1.
Dynamic compensation is included for system piping delays from the core to the temperature measurement system.
The Overtemperature AT trip Function is calculated for each loop as described in Note 1 of Table 3.3.1-1. Trip occurs if Overtemperature AT is indicated in two loops. The pressure and temperature signals are used for other control functions, therefore, the actuation logic must be able to withstand an input failure to the control system, which may then require the protection function Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-13 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued) actuation, and a single failure in the other channels providing the protection function actuation. Note that this Function also provides a signal to generate a turbine runback prior to reaching the Trip Setpoint. A turbine runback will reduce turbine power and reactor power. A reduction in power will normally alleviate the Overtemperature AT condition and may prevent a reactor trip.
The LCO requires all four channels of the Overtemperature AT trip Function to be OPERABLE. Note that the Overtemperature AT Function receives input from channels shared with other RTS Functions. Failures that affect multiple Functions require entry into the Conditions applicable to all affected Functions.
In MODE 1 or 2, the Overtemperature AT trip must be OPERABLE to prevent DNB. In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, this trip Function does not have to be OPERABLE because the reactor is not operating and there is insufficient heat production to be concerned about DNB.
: 7.
Overpower AT The Overpower AT trip Function ensures that protection is provided to ensure the integrity of the fuel (i.e., no fuel pellet melting and less than 1% cladding strain) under all possible overpower conditions. This trip Function also limits the required range of the Overtemperature AT trip Function and provides a backup to the Power Range Neutron Flux-High Setpoint trip.
The Overpower AT trip Function ensures that the allowable heat generation rate (kW/ft) of the fuel is not exceeded. It uses the AT of each loop as a measure of reactor power with a setpoint that is automatically varied with the following parameters:
0 reactor coolant average temperature-the Trip Setpoint is varied to correct for changes in coolant density and specific heat capacity with changes in coolant temperature; and rate of change of reactor coolant average temperature-including dynamic compensation for the delays between the core and the temperature measurement system.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-14 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)
The Overpower AT trip Function is calculated for each loop as per Note 2 of Table 3.3.1-1. Trip occurs if Overpower AT is indicated in two loops. The temperature signals are used for other control functions, therefore, the actuation logic must be able to withstand an input failure to the control system, which may then require the protection function actuation, and a single failure in the remaining channels providing the protection function actuation. Note that this Function also provides a signal to generate a turbine runback prior to reaching the Trip Setpoint. A turbine runback will reduce turbine power and reactor power. A reduction in power will normally alleviate the Overpower AT condition and may prevent a reactor trip.
The LCO requires four channels of the Overpower AT trip Function to be OPERABLE. Note that the Overpower AT trip Function receives input from channels shared with other RTS Functions.
Failures that affect multiple Functions require entry into the Conditions applicable to all affected Functions.
In MODE 1 or 2, the Overpower AT trip Function must be OPERABLE. These are the only times that enough heat is generated in the fuel to be concerned about the heat generation rates and overheating of the fuel. In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, this trip Function does not have to be OPERABLE because the reactor is not operating and there is insufficient heat production to be concerned about fuel overheating and fuel damage.
: 8.
Pressurizer Pressure The same sensors provide input to the Pressurizer Pressure-High and-Low trips and the Overtemperature AT trip. The Pressurizer Pressure channels are also used to provide input to the Pressurizer Pressure Control System, therefore, the actuation logic must be able to withstand an input failure to the control system, which may then require the protection function actuation, and a single failure in the other channels providing the protection function actuation.
: a.
Pressurizer Pressure-Low The Pressurizer Pressure-Low trip Function ensures that protection is provided against violating the DNBR limit due to low pressure.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-15 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1.
BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)
The LCO requires four channels of Pressurizer Pressure-Low to be OPERABLE.
In MODE 1, when DNB is a major concern, the Pressurizer Pressure-Low trip must be OPERABLE. This trip Function is automatically enabled on increasing power by the P-7 interlock (NIS power range P-10 or turbine impulse pressure greater than approximately 10% of full power equivalent P-13). On decreasing power, this trip Function is automatically blocked below P-7. Below the P-7 setpoint, power distributions that would cause DNB concerns are unlikely.
: b.
Pressurizer Pressure-High The Pressurizer Pressure-High trip Function ensures that protection is provided against overpressurizing the RCS.
This trip Function operates in conjunction with the pressurizer relief and safety valves to prevent RCS overpressure conditions.
The LCO requires four channels of the Pressurizer Pressure-High to be OPERABLE.
The Pressurizer Pressure-High LSSS is selected to be below the pressurizer safety valve actuation pressure and above the power operated relief valve (PORV) setting. This setting minimizes challenges to safety valves while avoiding unnecessary reactor trips for those pressure increases that can be controlled by the PORVs.
In MODE 1 or 2, the Pressurizer Pressure-High trip must be OPERABLE to help prevent RCS overpressurization and minimize challenges to the safety valves. In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, the Pressurizer Pressure-High trip Function does not have to be OPERABLE because transients that could cause an overpressure condition will either be slow to occur or will be mitigated by other trip functions required OPERABLE in these MODES. Therefore, the operator will have sufficient time when required to evaluate unit conditions and take corrective actions. Additionally, low temperature Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-16 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued) overpressure protection systems provide overpressure protection when below MODE 4.
: 9.
Pressurizer Water Level-High The Pressurizer Water Level-High trip Function provides a backup signal for the Pressurizer Pressure-High trip and also provides protection against water relief through the pressurizer safety valves. These valves are designed to pass steam in order to achieve their design energy removal rate. A reactor trip is actuated prior to the pressurizer becoming water solid. The setpoints are based on percent of instrument span. The LCO requires three channels of Pressurizer Water Level-High to be OPERABLE. The pressurizer level channels are used as input to the Pressurizer Level Control System. A fourth channel is not required to address control/protection interaction concerns. The level channels do not actuate the safety valves, and the high pressure reactor trip is set below the safety valve setting. Therefore, with the slow rate of charging available, pressure overshoot due to level channel failure cannot cause the valve to lift before reactor high pressure trip.
In MODE 1, when there is a potential for overfilling the pressurizer, the Pressurizer Water Level-High trip must be OPERABLE. This trip Function is automatically enabled on increasing power by the P-7 interlock. On decreasing power, this trip Function is automatically blocked below P-7. Below the P-7 setpoint, transients that could raise the pressurizer water level will be slow and the operator will have sufficient time to evaluate unit conditions and take corrective actions.
: 10.
Reactor Coolant Flow-Low
: a.
Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Single Loop)
The Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Single Loop) trip Function ensures that protection is provided against violating the DNBR limit due to low flow in one or more RCS loops, while avoiding reactor trips due to normal variations in loop flow.
Above the P-8 setpoint, which is approximately 48% RTP, a loss of flow in any RCS loop will actuate a reactor trip. The Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-17 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued) setpoints are based on the minimum flow specified in the COLR. Each RCS loop has three flow detectors to monitor flow. The flow signals are not used for any control system input.
The LCO requires three Reactor Coolant Flow-Low channels per loop to be OPERABLE in MODE 1 above P-8.
In MODE 1 above the P-8 setpoint, a loss of flow in one RCS loop could result in DNB conditions in the core. In MODE 1 below the P-8 setpoint, a loss of flow in two or more loops is required to actuate a reactor trip (Function 10.b) because of the lower power level and the greater margin to the design limit DNBR.
: b.
Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Two Loops)
The Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Two Loops) trip Function ensures that protection is provided against violating the DNBR limit due to low flow in two or more RCS loops while avoiding reactor trips due to normal variations in loop flow.
Above the P-7 setpoint and below the P-8 setpoint, a loss of flow in two or more loops will initiate a reactor trip. The setpoints are based on the minimum flow specified in the COLR. Each loop has three flow detectors to monitor flow.
The flow signals are not used for any control system input.
The LCO requires three Reactor Coolant Flow-Low channels per loop to be OPERABLE.
In MODE 1 above the P-7 setpoint and below the P-8 setpoint, the Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Two Loops) trip must be OPERABLE. Below the P-7 setpoint, all reactor trips on low flow are automatically blocked since power distributions that would cause a DNB concern at this low power level are unlikely. Above the P-7 setpoint, the reactor trip on low flow in two or more RCS loops is automatically enabled. Above the P-8 setpoint, a loss of flow in any one loop will actuate a reactor trip because of the higher power level and the reduced margin to the design limit DNBR.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-18 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)
: 11.
Undervoltage Reactor Coolant Pumps The Undervoltage RCPs reactor trip Function ensures that protection is provided against violating the DNBR limit due to a loss of flow in two or more RCS loops. The voltage to each RCP is monitored. Above the P-7 setpoint, a loss of voltage detected on two or more RCP buses will initiate a reactor trip. This trip Function will generate a reactor trip before the Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Two Loops) Trip Setpoint is reached. Time delays are incorporated into the Undervoltage RCPs channels to prevent reactor trips due to momentary electrical power transients.
The LCO requires a total of four Undervoltage RCPs channels (one per bus) to be OPERABLE.
In MODE 1 above the P-7 setpoint, the Undervoltage RCP trip must be OPERABLE. Below the P-7 setpoint, all reactor trips on loss of flow are automatically blocked since power distributions that would cause a DNB concern at this low power level are unlikely.
Above the P-7 setpoint, the reactor trip on loss of flow in two or more RCS loops is automatically enabled.
: 12.
Underfrequency Reactor Coolant Pumps The Underfrequency RCPs reactor trip Function ensures that protection is provided against violating the DNBR limit due to a loss of flow in two or more RCS loops from a major network frequency disturbance. An underfrequency condition will slow down the pumps, thereby reducing their coastdown time following a pump trip. The proper coastdown time is required so that reactor heat can be removed immediately after reactor trip. The frequency of each RCP bus is monitored. Above the P-7 setpoint, a loss of frequency detected on two or more RCP buses will initiate a reactor trip. This trip Function will generate a reactor trip before the Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Two Loops) Trip Setpoint is reached.
Time delays are incorporated into the Underfrequency RCPs channels to prevent reactor trips due to momentary electrical power transients.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1 -19 Revision'No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)
The LCO requires a total of four Underfrequency RCPs channels (one per bus) to be OPERABLE.
In MODE 1 above the P-7 setpoint, the Underfrequency RCPs trip must be OPERABLE. Below the P-7 setpoint, all reactor trips on loss of flow are automatically blocked since power distributions that would cause a DNB concern at this low power level are unlikely.
Above the P-7 setpoint, the reactor trip on loss of flow in two or more RCS loops is automatically enabled.
: 13.
Steam Generator Water Level-Low Low The SG Water Level-Low Low trip Function ensures that protection is provided against a loss of heat sink and actuates the AFW System prior to uncovering the SG tubes. The SGs are the heat sink for the reactor. In order to act as a heat sink, the SGs must contain a minimum amount of water. A narrow range low low level in any SG is indicative of a loss of heat sink for the reactor. The level transmitters provide input to the SG Level Control System.
Therefore, the actuation logic must be able to withstand an input failure to the control system, which may then require the protection function actuation, and a single failure in the other channels providing the protection function actuation. This Function also performs the ESFAS function of starting the AFW pumps on low low SG level.
The LCO requires four channels of SG Water Level-Low Low per SG to be OPERABLE since these channels are shared between protection and control.
In MODE 1 or 2, when the reactor requires a heat sink, the SG Water Level-Low Low trip must be OPERABLE. The normal source of water for the SGs is the Main Feedwater (MFW) System (not safety related). The MFW System is normally in operation in MODES 1, 2, 3, or 4. The AFW System is the safety related backup source of water to ensure that the SGs remain the heat sink for the reactor. In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, the SG Water Level-Low Low Function does not have to be OPERABLE because the reactor is not operating or even critical. Decay heat removal is Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-20 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued) accomplished by the steam generators in MODES 3 and 4 and by the Residual Heat Removal (RHR) System in Mode 4, 5, or 6.
: 14.
Turbine Trip
: a.
Turbine Trip-Low Fluid Oil Pressure The Turbine Trip-Low Fluid Oil Pressure trip Function anticipates the loss of heat removal capabilities of the secondary system following a turbine trip. This trip Function acts to minimize the pressure/temperature transient on the reactor. Any turbine trip from a power level below the P-9 setpoint, approximately 69% power, will not actuate a reactor trip. Four pressure switches monitor the control oil pressure in the Turbine Electrohydraulic Control System. A low pressure condition sensed by two-out-of-four pressure switches will actuate a reactor trip. These pressure switches do not provide any input to the control system. The unit is designed to withstand a complete loss of load and not sustain core damage or challenge the RCS pressure limitations. Core protection is provided by the Pressurizer Pressure-High trip Function and RCS integrity is ensured by the pressurizer safety valves. Turbine Trip-Low Fluid Oil Pressure is diverse to the Turbine Trip-Turbine Stop Valve Closure function.
The LCO requires four channels of Turbine Trip-Low Fluid Oil Pressure to be OPERABLE in MODE 1 above P-9.
Below the P-9 setpoint, a turbine trip does not actuate a reactor trip. In MODE 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, there is no potential for a turbine trip, and the Turbine Trip-Low Fluid Oil Pressure trip Function does not need to be OPERABLE.
: b.
Turbine Trip-Turbine Stop Valve Closure The Turbine Trip-Turbine Stop Valve Closure trip Function anticipates the loss of heat removal capabilities of the secondary system following a turbine trip from a power level above the P-9 setpoint, approximately 69% power. The trip Function anticipates the loss of secondary heat removal Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-21 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued) capability that occurs when the stop valves close. Tripping the reactor in anticipation of loss of secondary heat removal acts to minimize the pressure and temperature transient on the reactor. This trip Function will not and is not required to operate in the presence of a single channel failure. The unit is designed to withstand a complete loss of load and not sustain core damage or challenge the RCS pressure limitations. Core protection is provided by the Pressurizer Pressure-High trip Function, and RCS integrity is ensured by the pressurizer safety valves. This trip Function is diverse to the Turbine Trip-Low Fluid Oil Pressure trip Function. Each turbine stop valve is equipped with one limit switch that inputs to the RTS. If all four limit switches indicate that the stop valves are closed, a reactor trip is initiated.
The LSSS for this Function is set to assure channel trip occurs when the associated stop valve is completely closed.
The LCO requires four Turbine Trip-Turbine Stop Valve Closure channels, one per valve, to be OPERABLE in MODE 1 above P-9. All four channels must trip to cause reactor trip.
Below the P-9 setpoint, a load rejection can be accommodated by the Steam Dump System. In MODE 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, there is no potential for a load rejection, and the Turbine Trip-Stop Valve Closure trip Function does not need to be OPERABLE.
: 15.
Safety Iniection Input from Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System The SI Input from ESFAS ensures that if a reactor trip has not already been generated by the RTS, the ESFAS automatic actuation logic will initiate a reactor trip upon any signal that initiates SI. This is a condition of acceptability for the LOCA.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-22 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)
However, other transients and accidents take credit or varying levels of ESF performance and rely upon rod insertion, except for the most reactive rod that is assumed to be fully withdrawn, to ensure reactor shutdown. Therefore, a reactor trip is initiated every time an SI signal is present.
Trip Setpoint and Allowable Values are not applicable to this Function. The SI Input is provided by a manual switch or by the automatic actuation logic. Therefore, there is no measurement signal with which to associate an LSSS.
The LCO requires two trains of SI Input from ESFAS to be OPERABLE in MODE 1 or 2.
A reactor trip is initiated every time an SI signal is present.
Therefore, this trip Function must be OPERABLE in MODE 1 or 2, when the reactor is critical, and must be shut down in the event of an accident. In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, the reactor is not critical, and this trip Function does not need to be OPERABLE.
: 16.
Reactor Trip System Interlocks Reactor protection interlocks are provided to ensure reactor trips are in the correct configuration for the current unit status. They back up operator actions to ensure protection system Functions are not bypassed during unit conditions under which the safety analysis assumes the Functions are not bypassed. Therefore, the interlock Functions do not need to be OPERABLE when the associated reactor trip functions are outside the applicable MODES. These are:
: a.
Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, P-6 The Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, P-6 interlock is actuated when any NIS intermediate range channel goes approximately one decade (Westinghouse-supplied only) or three decades (Thermo Scientific-supplied only) above the minimum channel reading. If both channels drop below the setpoint, the permissive will automatically be defeated. The LCO requirement for the P-6 interlock ensures that the following Functions are performed:
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-23 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued) on increasing power, the P-6 interlock allows the manual block of the NIS Source Range, Neutron Flux reactor trip. This prevents a premature block of the source range trip and allows the operator to ensure that the intermediate range is OPERABLE prior to leaving the source range. When the source range trip is blocked, the high voltage to the detectors is also removed (Westinghouse-supplied only); and on decreasing power, the P-6 interlock automatically energizes the NIS source range detectors (Westinghouse-supplied only) and enables the NIS Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip.
The LCO requires two channels of Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, P-6 interlock to be OPERABLE in MODE 2 when below the P-6 interlock setpoint.
Above the P-6 interlock setpoint, the NIS Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip will be blocked, and this Function will no longer be necessary.
In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, the P-6 interlock does not have to be OPERABLE because the NIS Source Range is providing core protection.
: b.
Low Power Reactor Trips Block, P-7 The Low Power Reactor Trips Block, P-7 interlock is actuated by input from either the Power Range Neutron Flux, P-1 0, or the Turbine Impulse Pressure, P-1 3 interlock. The LCO requirement for the P-7 interlock ensures that the following Functions are performed:
(1) on increasing power, the P-7 interlock automatically enables reactor trips on the following Functions:
Pressurizer Pressure-Low; Pressurizer Water Level-High; Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-24 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)
Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Two Loops);
Undervoltage RCPs; and Underfrequency RCPs.
These reactor trips are only required when operating above the P-7 setpoint (approximately 10% power). The reactor trips provide protection against violating the DNBR limit.
Below the P-7 setpoint, the RCS is capable of providing sufficient natural circulation without any RCP running.
(2) on decreasing power, the P-7 interlock automatically blocks reactor trips on the following Functions:
Pressurizer Pressure-Low; Pressurizer Water Level-High; Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Two Loops);
Undervoltage RCPs; and Underfrequency RCPs.
Trip Setpoint and Allowable Value are not applicable to the P-7 interlock because it is a logic Function and thus has no parameter with which to associate an LSSS.
The P-7 interlock is a logic Function with train and not channel identity. Therefore, the LCO requires one channel per train of Low Power Reactor Trips Block, P-7 interlock to be OPERABLE in MODE 1.
The low power trips are blocked below the P-7 setpoint and unblocked above the P-7 setpoint. In MODE 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, this Function does not have to be OPERABLE because the interlock performs its Function when power level drops below 10% power, which is in MODE 1.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-25 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)
: c.
Power Range Neutron Flux, P-8 The Power Range Neutron Flux, P-8 interlock is actuated at approximately 48% power as determined by two-out-of-four NIS power range detectors. The P-8 interlock automatically enables the Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Single Loop) reactor trip on low flow in one or more RCS loops on increasing power. The LCO requirement for this trip Function ensures that protection is provided against a loss of flow in any RCS loop that could result in DNB conditions in the core when greater than approximately 48% power. On decreasing power below the P-8 setpoint, the reactor trip on low flow in any loop is automatically blocked.
The LCO requires four channels of Power Range Neutron Flux, P-8 interlock to be OPERABLE in MODE 1.
In MODE 1, a loss of flow in one RCS loop could result in DNB conditions, so the Power Range Neutron Flux, P-8 interlock must be OPERABLE. In MODE 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, this Function does not have to be OPERABLE because the core is not producing sufficient power to be concerned about DNB conditions.
: d.
Power Range Neutron Flux, P-9 The Power Range Neutron Flux, P-9 interlock is actuated at approximately 69% power as determined by two-out-of-four NIS power range detectors. The LCO requirement for this Function ensures that the Turbine Trip-Low Fluid Oil Pressure and Turbine Trip-Turbine Stop Valve Closure reactor trips are enabled above the P-9 setpoint. Above the P-9 setpoint, a turbine trip will cause a load rejection beyond the capacity of the Steam Dump System. A reactor trip is automatically initiated on a turbine trip when it is above the P-9 setpoint, to minimize the transient on the reactor.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-26 Revision No. 7
RTS lnstrurr.ntation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)
The LCO requires four channels of Power Range Neutron Flux, P-9 interlock to be OPERABLE in MODE 1.
In MODE 1, a turbine trip could cause a load rejection beyond the capacity of the Steam Dump System, so the Power Range Neutron Flux interlock must be OPERABLE.
In MODE 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, this Function does not have to be OPERABLE because the reactor is not at a power level sufficient to have a load rejection beyond the capacity of the Steam Dump System.
: e.
Power Range Neutron Flux, P-1 0 The Power Range Neutron Flux, P-10 interlock is actuated at approximately 10% power, as determined by two-out-of-four NIS power range detectors. If power level falls below 10% RTP on 3 of 4 channels, the nuclear instrument trips will be automatically unblocked. The LCO requirement for the P-10 interlock ensures that the following Functions are performed:
on increasing power, the P-10 interlock allows the operator to manually block the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux reactor trip. Note that blocking the reactor trip also blocks the signal to prevent automatic and manual rod withdrawal; on increasing power, the P-1 0 interlock allows the operator to manually block the Power Range Neutron Flux-Low reactor trip; on increasing power, the P-10 interlock automatically provides a backup signal to block the Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip, and also to de-energize the (Westinghouse-supplied only) NIS source range detectors; Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-27 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued) the P-1 0 interlock provides one of the two inputs to the P-7 interlock; and on decreasing power, the P-10 interlock automatically enables the Power Range Neutron Flux-Low reactor trip and the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux reactor trip (and rod stop):
The LCO requires four channels of Power Range Neutron Flux, P-10 interlock to be OPERABLE in MODE 1 or 2.
OPERABILITY in MODE 1 ensures the Function is available to perform its decreasing power Functions in the event of a reactor shutdown. This Function must be OPERABLE in MODE 2 to ensure that core protection is provided during a startup or shutdown by the Power Range Neutron Flux-Low and Intermediate Range Neutron Flux reactor trips. In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, this Function does not have to be OPERABLE because the reactor is not at power and the Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip provides core protection.
: f.
Turbine Impulse Pressure, P-13 The Turbine Impulse Pressure, P-13 interlock is actuated when the pressure in the first stage of the high pressure turbine is greater than approximately 10% of the rated full power pressure. This is determined by one-out-of-two pressure detectors. The LCO requirement for this Function ensures that one of the inputs to the P-7 interlock is available.
The LCO requires two channels of Turbine Impulse Pressure, P-1 3 interlock to be OPERABLE in MODE 1.
The Turbine Impulse Chamber Pressure, P-13 interlock must be OPERABLE when the turbine generator is operating. The interlock Function is not required OPERABLE in MODE 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 because the turbine generator is not operating.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-28 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)
: 17.
Reactor Trip Breakers This trip Function applies to the RTBs exclusive of individual trip mechanisms. The LCO requires two OPERABLE trains of trip breakers. A trip breaker train consists of all trip breakers associated with a single RTS logic train that are racked in, closed, and capable of supplying power to the CRD System. Thus, the train may consist of the main breaker, bypass breaker, or main breaker and bypass breaker, depending upon the system configuration. Two OPERABLE trains ensure no single random failure can disable the RTS trip capability.
These trip Functions must be OPERABLE in MODE 1 or 2 when the reactor is critical. In MODE 3, 4, or 5, these RTS trip Functions must be OPERABLE when the RTBs or associated bypass breakers are closed, and the CRD System is capable of rod withdrawal.
: 18.
Reactor Trip Breaker Undervoltage and Shunt Trip Mechanisms The LCO requires both the Undervoltage and Shunt Trip Mechanisms to be OPERABLE for each RTB that is in service.
The trip mechanisms are not required to be OPERABLE for trip breakers that are open, racked out, incapable of supplying power to the CRD System, or declared inoperable under Function 17 above. OPERABILITY of both trip mechanisms on each breaker ensures that no single trip mechanism failure will prevent opening any breaker on a valid signal.
These trip Functions must be OPERABLE in MODE 1 or 2 when the reactor is critical. In MODE 3, 4, or 5, these RTS trip Functions must be OPERABLE when the RTBs or associated bypass breakers are closed, and the CRD System is capable of rod withdrawal.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-29 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)
: 19.
Automatic Trip LoQic The LCO requirement for the RTBs (Functions 17 and 18) and Automatic Trip Logic (Function 19) ensures that means are provided to interrupt the power to allow the rods to fall into the reactor core. Each RTB is equipped with an undervoltage coil and a shunt trip coil to trip the breaker open when needed. Each train RTB has a bypass breaker to allow testing of the trip breaker while the unit is at power. The reactor trip signals generated by the RTS Automatic Trip Logic cause the RTBs and associated bypass breakers to open and shut down the reactor.
The LCO requires two trains of RTS Automatic Trip Logic to be OPERABLE. Having two OPERABLE channels ensures that random failure of a single logic channel will not prevent reactor trip.
These trip Functions must be OPERABLE in MODE 1 or 2 when the reactor is critical. In MODE 3, 4, or 5, these RTS trip Functions must be OPERABLE when the RTBs and associated bypass breakers are closed, and the CRD System is capable of rod withdrawal.
The RTS instrumentation satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36 (Ref. 6).
ACTIONS A Note has been added to the ACTIONS to clarify the application of Completion Time rules. The Conditions of this Specification may be entered independently for each Function listed in Table 3.3.1-1. When the Required Channels in Table 3.3.1-1 are specified (e.g., on a per steam line, per loop, per SG, etc., basis), then the Condition may be entered separately for each steam line, loop, SG, etc., as appropriate.
A channel shall be OPERABLE if the point at which the channel trips is found more conservative than the Allowable Value. In the event a channel's trip setpoint is found less conservative than the Allowable Value, or the transmitter, instrument loop, signal processing electronics, or bistable is found inoperable, then all affected Functions provided by that channel must be declared inoperable and the LCO Condition(s) entered for the protection Function(s) affected. Unless otherwise specified, if plant conditions warrant, the trip setpoint may be set outside the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT calibration tolerance band as long as the trip setpoint is conservative with respect to the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT. If the trip setpoint is found outside of the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT calibration tolerance band and non-conservative with respect Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-30 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued) to the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT, the setpoint shall be re-adjusted.
When the number of inoperable channels in a trip Function exceed those specified in one or other related Conditions associated with a trip Function, then the unit is outside the safety analysis. Therefore, LCO 3.0.3 must be immediately entered if applicable in the current MODE of operation.
A.1 Condition A applies to all RTS protection Functions. Condition A addresses the situation where one or more required channels for one or more Functions are inoperable at the same time. The Required Action is to refer to Table 3.3.1-1 and to take the Required Actions for the protection functions affected. The Completion Times are those from the referenced Conditions and Required Actions.
B.1 and B.2 Condition B applies to the Manual Reactor Trip in MODE 1 or 2. This action addresses the train orientation of the SSPS for this Function. With one channel inoperable, the inoperable channel must be restored to OPERABLE status within 48 hours. In this Condition, the remaining OPERABLE channel is adequate to perform the safety function.
The Completion Time of 48 hours is reasonable considering that there are two automatic actuation trains and another manual initiation channel OPERABLE, and the low probability of an event occurring during this interval.
If the Manual Reactor Trip Function cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the allowed 48 hour Completion Time, the unit must be brought to a MODE in which the requirement does not apply. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 additional hours (54 hours total time). The 6 additional hours are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach MODE 3 from full power operation in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems. With the unit in MODE 3, the MODE 1 and 2 requirements for this trip Function are no longer required and Condition C is entered.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-31 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued)
C.1 and C.2 Condition C applies to the following reactor trip Functions in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs closed and the CRD System capable of rod withdrawal:
Manual Reactor Trip; RTBs; RTB Undervoltage and Shunt Trip Mechanisms; and Automatic Trip Logic.
This action addresses the train orientation of the SSPS for these Functions. With one channel or train inoperable, the inoperable channel or train must be restored to OPERABLE status within 48 hours. If the affected Function(s) cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the allowed 48 hour Completion Time, the unit must be placed in a condition in which the requirement does not apply. To achieve this status, the RTBs must be opened within the next hour. The additional hour provides sufficient time to accomplish the action in an orderly manner. With the RTBs open, these Functions are no longer required.
The Completion Time is reasonable considering that in this Condition, the remaining OPERABLE train is adequate to perform the safety function, and given the low probability of an event occurring during this interval.
D.1.1, D.1.2, and D.2 With one of the NIS power range detectors inoperable, 1/4 of the radial power distribution monitoring capability is lost. Therefore, SR 3.2.4.2 must be performed (Required Action D. 1.1) within 12 hours of THERMAL POWER exceeding 75% RTP and once per 12 hours thereafter.
Calculating QPTR every 12 hours compensates for the lost monitoring capability due to the inoperable NIS power range channel and allows continued unit operation at power levels> 75% RTP. At power levels <
75% RTP, operation of the core with radial power distributions beyond the design limits, at a power level where DNB conditions may exist, is prevented. The 12 hour Completion Time is consistent with the Surveillance Requirement Frequency in LCO 3.2.4, "QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO (QPTR)." Required Action D.1.1 has been modified by a Note which only requires SR 3.2.4.2 to be performed if the Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-32 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued)
Power Range Neutron Flux input to QPTR becomes inoperable. Failure of a component in the Power Range Neutron Flux Channel which renders the High Flux Trip Function inoperable may not affect the capability to monitor QPTR. As such, determining QPTR using movable incore detectors may not be necessary.
Condition D applies to the Power Range Neutron Flux-High and Power Range Neutron Flux-High Positive Rate Functions.
The NIS power range detectors provide input to the CRD System and the SG Water Level Control System and, therefore, have a two-out-of-four trip logic. A known inoperable channel must be placed in the tripped condition. This results in a partial trip condition requiring only one-out-of-three logic for actuation. The 72 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel in the tripped condition is justified in WCAP-14333-P-A (Ref. 11).
As an alternative to the above Actions, the plant must be placed in a MODE where this Function is no longer required OPERABLE. 78 hours are allowed to place the plant in MODE 3. The 78 hour Completion Time includes 72 hours for channel corrective maintenance, and an additional 6 hours for the MODE reduction as required by Required Action D.2.
This is a reasonable time, based on operating experience, to reach MODE 3 from full power in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems. If Required Actions cannot be completed within their allowed Completion Times, LCO 3.0.3 must be entered.
The Required Actions have been modified by a Note that allows placing the inoperable channel in the bypass condition for up to 12 hours while performing routine surveillance testing of other channels. The Note also allows placing the inoperable channel in the bypass condition to allow setpoint adjustments of other channels when required to reduce the setpoint in accordance with other Technical Specifications. The 12 hour time limit is justified in Reference 11.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-33 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued)
E.1 and E.2 Condition E applies to the following reactor trip Functions:
Power Range Neutron Flux-Low; Overtemperature AT; Overpower AT; Pressurizer Pressure-High; and SG Water Level-Low Low.
A known inoperable channel must be placed in the tripped condition within 72 hours. Placing the channel in the tripped condition results in a partial trip condition requiring only one-out-of-three logic for actuation of the two-out-of-four trips. The 72 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel in the tripped condition is justified in Reference 11.
If the operable channel cannot be placed in the trip condition within the specified Completion Time, the unit must be placed in a MODE where these Functions are not required OPERABLE. An additional 6 hours is allowed to place the unit in MODE 3. Six hours is a reasonable time, based on operating experience, to place the unit in MODE 3 from full power in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
The Required Actions have been modified by a Note that allows placing the inoperable channel in the bypassed condition for up to 12 hours while performing routine surveillance testing of the other channels. The 12 hour time limit is justified in Reference 11.
F.1 and F.2 Condition F applies to the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux trip when THERMAL POWER is above the P-6 setpoint and below the P-10 setpoint and one channel is inoperable. Above the P-6 setpoint and below Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-34 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued) the P-10 setpoint, the NIS intermediate range detector performs the monitoring Functions. If THERMAL POWER is greater than the P-6 setpoint but less than the P-10 setpoint, 24 hours is allowed to reduce THERMAL POWER below the P-6 setpoint or increase to THERMAL POWER above the P-10 setpoint. The NIS Intermediate Range Neutron Flux channels must be OPERABLE when the power level is above the capability of the source range, P-6, and below the capability of the power range, P-10. If THERMAL POWER is greater than the P-10 setpoint, the NIS power range detectors perform the monitoring and protection functions and the intermediate range is not required. The Completion Times allow for a slow and controlled power adjustment above P-10 or below P-6 and take into account the redundant capability afforded by the redundant OPERABLE channel, and the low probability of its failure during this period. This action does not require the inoperable channel to be tripped because the Function uses one-out-of-two logic. Tripping one channel would trip the reactor. Thus, the Required Actions specified in this Condition are only applicable when channel failure does not result in reactor trip.
G.1 and G.2 Condition G applies to two inoperable Intermediate Range Neutron Flux trip channels in MODE 2 when THERMAL POWER is above the P-6 setpoint and below the P-10 setpoint.
Required Actions specified in this Condition are only applicable when channel failures do not result in reactor trip. Above the P-6 setpoint and below the P-10 setpoint, the NIS intermediate range detector performs the monitoring Functions. With no intermediate range channels OPERABLE, the Required Actions are to suspend operations involving positive reactivity additions immediately. This will preclude any power level increase since there are no OPERABLE Intermediate Range Neutron Flux channels. The operator must also reduce THERMAL POWER below the P-6 setpoint within two hours. Below P-6, the Source Range Neutron Flux channels will be able to monitor the core power level. The Completion Time of 2 hours will allow a slow and controlled power reduction to less than the P-6 setpoint and takes into account the low probability of occurrence of an event during this period that may require the protection afforded by the NIS Intermediate Range Neutron Flux trip. Required Action G.1 is modified by a Note to indicate that normal plant control operations that individually add limited positive reactivity (e.g., temperature or boron fluctuations associated with RCS inventory management or temperature control) are not precluded by this Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-35 Revision No-7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued)
Action.
H. 1 Condition H applies to the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux trip when THERMAL POWER is below the P-6 setpoint and one or two channels are inoperable. Below the P-6 setpoint, the NIS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions. The inoperable NIS intermediate range channel(s) must be returned to OPERABLE status prior to increasing power above the P-6 setpoint. The NIS intermediate range channels must be OPERABLE when the power level is above the capability of the source range, P-6, and below the capability of the power range, P-10.
1.1 Condition I applies to one inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux trip channel when in MODE 2, below the P-6 setpoint, and performing a reactor startup. With the unit in this Condition, below P-6, the NIS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions. With one of the two channels inoperable, operations involving positive reactivity additions shall be suspended immediately. This will preclude any power escalation.
With only one source range channel OPERABLE, core protection is severely reduced and any actions that add positive reactivity to the core must be suspended immediately. Required Action 1.1 is modified by a Note to indicate that normal plant control operations that individually add limited positive reactivity (e.g., temperature or boron fluctuations associated with RCS inventory management or temperature control) are not precluded by this Action.
J. 1 Condition J applies to two inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux trip channels when in MODE 2, below the P-6 setpoint, and performing a reactor startup, or in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs closed and the CRD System capable of rod withdrawal. With the unit in this Condition, below P-6, the NIS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions. With both source range channels inoperable, the RTBs must be opened immediately. With the RTBs open, the core is in a more stable condition and the unit exits this Condition.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-36 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued)
K.1 and K.2 Condition K applies to one inoperable source range channel in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs closed and the CRD System capable of rod withdrawal. With the unit in this Condition, below P-6, the NIS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions. With one of the source range channels inoperable, 48 hours is allowed to restore it to an OPERABLE status. If the channel cannot be returned to an OPERABLE status, 1 additional hour is allowed to open the RTBs. Once the RTBs are open, the core is in a more stable condition and the unit exits this condition. The allowance of 48 hours to restore the channel to OPERABLE status, and the additional hour to open the RTBs, are justified in Reference 7.
L.1 and L.2 Condition L applies to the following reactor trip Functions:
Pressurizer Pressure-Low; Pressurizer Water Level-High; Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Two Loops);
Undervoltage RCPs; and Underfrequency RCPs.
With one channel inoperable, the inoperable channel must be placed in the tripped condition within 72 hours. Placing the channel in the tripped condition results in a partial trip condition requiring only one additional channel to initiate a reactor trip above the P-7 setpoint 7 (and below the P-8 setpoint for the Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Two Loops) Function).
These Functions do not have to be OPERABLE below the P-7 setpoint because, for the Pressurizer Water Level-High function, transients are slow enough for manual action; and for the other functions, power distributions that would cause a DNB concern at this low power level are unlikely. The 72 hours allowed to place the channel in the tripped Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 8.3.1-37 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued) condition is justified in Reference 11. An additional 6 hours is allowed to reduce THERMAL POWER to below P-7 if the inoperable channel cannot be restored to OPERABLE status or placed in trip within the specified Completion Time.
Allowance of this time interval takes into consideration the redundant capability provided by the remaining redundant OPERABLE channel, and the low probability of occurrence of an event during this period that may require the protection afforded by the Functions associated with Condition L.
The Required Actions have been modified by a Note that allows placing the inoperable channel in the bypassed condition for up to 12 hours while performing routine surveillance testing of the other channels. The 12 hour time limit is justified in Reference 11.
M.1 and M.2 Condition M applies to the Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Single Loop) reactor trip Function. With one channel inoperable, the inoperable channel must be placed in trip within 6 hours. If the channel cannot be restored to OPERABLE status or the channel placed in trip within the 6 hours, then THERMAL POWER must be reduced below the P-8 setpoint within the next 4 hours. This places the unit in a MODE where the LCO is no longer applicable. This trip Function does not have to be OPERABLE below the P-8 setpoint because other RTS trip Functions provide core protection below the P-8 setpoint. The 6 hours allowed to restore the channel to OPERABLE status or place in trip and the 4 additional hours allowed to reduce THERMAL POWER to below the P-8 setpoint are justified in Reference 7.
The Required Actions have been modified by a Note that allows placing the inoperable channel in the bypassed condition for up to 4 hours while performing routine surveillance testing of the other channels. The 4 hour time limit is justified in Reference 7.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-38 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued)
N.1, N.2, 0.1, and 0.2 Condition N and 0 apply to Turbine Trip on Stop Valve EH Pressure Low or on Turbine Stop Valve Closure. With one channel inoperable, the inoperable channel must be placed in the trip condition within 72 hours. If placed in the tripped condition, this results in a partial trip condition requiring fewer additional channels to initiate a reactor trip. If the channel cannot be restored to OPERABLE status or placed in the trip condition, then power must be reduced below the P-9 setpoint within the next 4 hours. The 72 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel in the tripped condition and the 4 hours allowed for reducing power are justified in Reference 11.
The Required Actions of Condition N have been modified by a Note that allows placing the inoperable channel in the bypassed condition for up to 12 hours while performing routine surveillance testing of the other channels. The 12 hour time limit is justified in Reference 11.
P.1 and P.2 Condition P applies to the SI Input from ESFAS reactor trip and the RTS Automatic Trip Logic in MODES 1 and 2. These actions address the train orientation of the RTS for these Functions. With one train inoperable, 24 hours are allowed to restore the train to OPERABLE status (Required Action P.1) or the unit must be placed in MODE 3 within the next 6 hours.
The Completion Time of 24 hours (Required Action P.1) is reasonable considering that in this Condition, the remaining OPERABLE train is adequate to perform the safety function and given the low probability of an event during this interval. The 24 hours allowed to restore the inoperable RTS Automatic Trip Logic train to OPERABLE status is justified in Reference 11. The additional Completion Time of 6 hours (Required Action P.2) is reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach MODE 3 from full power in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
The Required Actions have been modified by a Note that allows bypassing one train up to 4 hours for surveillance testing, provided the other train is OPERABLE. The 4 hour time limit for testing the RTS Automatic Trip Logic train may include testing the RTB also, if both the Logic test and RTB test are conducted within the 4 hour time limit. The 4 hour time limit is justified in Reference 11.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-39 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued)
Q.1 and Q.2 Condition Q applies to the RTBs in MODES 1 and 2. These actions address the train orientation of the RTS for the RTBs. With one train inoperable, 24 hours is allowed for train corrective maintenance to restore the train to OPERABLE status or the unit must be placed in MODE 3 within the next 6 hours. The 24 hour Completion Time is justified in Reference 12. The Completion Time of 6 hours is reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach MODE 3 from full power in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems. Placing the unit in MODE 3 removes the requirement for this particular Function.
The Required Actions have been modified by a Note. The Note allows one RTB to be bypassed for up to 4 hours for surveillance testing, provided the other RTB is OPERABLE. The 4 hour time limit is justified in Reference 12.
R.1 and R.2 Condition R applies to the P-6 and P-10 interlocks. With one or more channel(s) inoperable for one-out-of-two or two-out-of-four coincidence logic, the associated interlock must be verified to be in its required state for the existing unit condition within 1 hour or the unit must be placed in MODE 3 within the next 6 hours. Verifying the interlock status, by visual observation of the control room status lights, manually accomplishes the interlock's Function. The Completion Time of 1 hour is based on operating experience and the minimum amount of time allowed for manual operator actions. The Completion Time of 6 hours is reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach MODE 3 from full power in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems. The 1 hour and 6 hour Completion Times are equal to the time allowed by LCO 3.0.3 for shutdown actions in the event of a complete loss of RTS Function.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-40 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued)
S.1 and S.2 Condition S applies to the P-7, P-8, P-9, and P-13 interlocks. With one or more channel(s) inoperable for one-out-of-two or two-out-of-four coincidence logic, the associated interlock must be verified to be in its required state for the existing unit condition within 1 hour or the unit must be placed in MODE 2 within the next 6 hours. These actions are conservative for the case where power level is being raised. Verifying the interlock status, by visual observation of the control room status lights, manually accomplishes the interlock's Function. The Completion Time of 1 hour is based on operating experience and the minimum amount of time allowed for manual operator actions. The Completion Time of 6 hours is reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach MODE 2 from full power in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
T.1 and T.2 Condition T applies to the RTB Undervoltage and Shunt Trip Mechanisms, or diverse trip features, in MODES 1 and 2. With one of the diverse trip features inoperable, it must be restored to an OPERABLE status within 48 hours or the unit must be placed in a MODE where the requirement does not apply. This is accomplished by placing the unit in MODE 3 within the next 6 hours (54 hours total time). With both diverse trip features inoperable, the reactor trip breaker is inoperable and Condition Q is entered. The Completion Time of 6 hours is a reasonable time, based on operating experience, to reach MODE 3 from full power in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems. With the unit in MODE 3, the MODES 1 and 2 requirement for this function is no longer required and Condition C is entered.
The Completion Time of 48 hours for Required Action T.1 is reasonable considering that in this Condition there is one remaining diverse feature for the affected RTB, and one OPERABLE RTB capable of performing the safety function and given the low probability of an event occurring during this interval.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-41 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued)
U.1 With two RTS trains inoperable, no automatic capability is available to shut down the reactor, and immediate plant shutdown in accordance with LCO 3.0.3 is required.
SURVEILLANCE The SRs for each RTS Function are identified by the SRs column of REQUIREMENTS Table 3.3.1-1 for that Function.
A Note has been added to the SR Table stating that Table 3.3.1-1 determines which SRs apply to which RTS Functions.
Note that each channel of process protection supplies both trains of the RTS. When testing Channel I, Train A and Train B must be examined.
Similarly, Train A and Train B must be examined when testing Channel II, Channel III, and Channel IV (if applicable). The CHANNEL CALIBRATION and COTs are performed in a manner that is consistent with the assumptions used in analytically calculating the required channel accuracies.
Performing the Neutron Flux Instrumentation surveillances meets the License Renewal Commitments for License Renewal Program for High-Range Radiation and Neutron Flux Instrumentation Circuits per UFSAR Chapter 18, Table 18-1 and License Renewal Commitments specification CNS-1274.00-00-0016.
SR 3.3.1.1 Performance of the CHANNEL CHECK ensures that gross failure of instrumentation has not occurred. A CHANNEL CHECK is normally a comparison of the parameter indicated on one channel to a similar parameter on other channels. It is based on the assumption that instrument channels monitoring the same parameter should read approximately the same value. Significant deviations between the two instrument channels could be an indication of excessive instrument drift in one of the channels or of something even more serious. A CHANNEL CHECK will detect gross channel failure; thus, it is key to verifying that the instrumentation continues to operate properly between each CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
Agreement criteria are determined by the unit staff based on a combination of the channel instrument uncertainties, including indication Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-42 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued) and readability. If a channel is outside the criteria, it may be an indication that the sensor or the signal processing equipment has drifted outside its limit.
The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
SR 3.3.1.2 SR 3.3.1.2 compares the calorimetric heat balance calculation to the NIS channel output. If the calorimetric exceeds the NIS channel output by
> 2% RTP, the NIS is not declared inoperable, but must be adjusted. If the NIS channel output cannot be properly adjusted, the channel is declared inoperable.
Two Notes modify SR 3.3.1.2. The first Note indicates that the NIS channel output shall be adjusted consistent with the calorimetric results if the absolute difference between the NIS channel output and the calorimetric is > 2% RTP. The second Note clarifies that this Surveillance is required only if reactor power is >_ 15% RTP and that 12 hours is allowed for completing the first Surveillance after reaching 15% RTP. At lower power levels, calorimetric data are inaccurate.
The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
SR '3.3.1.3 SR 3.3.1.3 compares the incore system to the NIS channel output. If the absolute difference is _> 3%, the NIS channel is still OPERABLE, but must be readjusted.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-43 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
If the NIS channel cannot be properly readjusted, the channel is declared inoperable. This Surveillance is performed to verify the f(AI) input to the overtemperature AT Function and overpower AT Function.
Two Notes modify SR 3.3.1.3. Note 1 indicates that the excore NIS channel shall be adjusted if the absolute difference between the incore and excore AFD is _> 3%. Note 2 clarifies that the Surveillance is required only if reactor power is >_ 15% RTP and that 24 hours is allowed for completing the first Surveillance after reaching 15% RTP.
The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
SR 3.3.1.4 SR 3.3.1.4 is the performance of a TADOT. This test shall verify OPERABILITY by actuation of the end devices.
The RTB test shall include separate verification of the undervoltage and shunt trip mechanisms. Independent verification of RTB undervoltage and shunt trip Function is not required for the bypass breakers. No capability is provided for performing such a test at power. The independent test for bypass breakers is included in SR 3.3.1.14. The bypass breaker test shall include a local shunt trip. A Note has been added to indicate that this test must be performed on the bypass breaker prior to placing it in service.
The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
SR 3.3.1.5 SR 3.3.1.5 is the performance of an ACTUATION LOGIC TEST. The SSPS is tested using the semiautomatic tester. The train being tested is placed in the bypass condition, thus preventing inadvertent actuation.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-44 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
Through the semiautomatic tester, all possible logic combinations, with and without applicable permissives, are tested for each protection function. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
SR 3.3.1.6 SR 3.3.1.6 is a calibration of the excore channels to the incore channels.
If the measurements do not agree, the excore channels are not declared inoperable but must be calibrated to agree with the incore detector measurements. If the excore channels cannot be adjusted, the channels are declared inoperable. This Surveillance is performed to verify the f(AI) input to the overtemperature AT Function and overpower AT Function.
At Beginning of Cycle (BOC), the excore channels are compared to the incore detector measurements prior to exceeding 75% power. Excore detectors are adjusted as necessary. This low power surveillance satisfies the initial performance of SR 3.3.1.6 with subsequent surveillances conducted at least every 92 EFPD.
At BOC, after reaching full power steady state conditions, additional incore and excore measurements are taken and excore detectors are adjusted as necessary.
The Mj factors are normally only determined at BOC, but they may be changed at other points in the fuel cycle if the relationship between excore and incore measurements changes significantly.
A Note modifies SR 3.3.1.6. The Note states that this Surveillance is required only if reactor power is > 75% RTP and that 24 hours is allowed for completing the first surveillance after reaching 75% RTP.
The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
SR 3.3.1.7 SR 3.3.1.7 is the performance of a COT.
A COT is performed on each required channel to ensure the channel will Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1--45 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued) perform the intended Function.
The tested portion of the loop must trip within the Allowable Values specified in Table 3.3.1-1.
The setpoint shall be left set consistent with the assumptions of the setpoint methodology.
SR 3.3.1.7 is modified by a Note that provides a 4 hour delay in the requirement to perform this Surveillance for source range instrumentation when entering MODE 3 from MODE 2. This Note allows a normal shutdown to proceed without a delay for testing in MODE 2 and for a short time in MODE 3 until the RTBs are open and SR 3.3.1.7 is no longer required to be performed. If the unit is to be in MODE 3 with the RTBs closed for > 4 hours this Surveillance must be completed within 4 hours after entry into MODE 3.
The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
For Functions for which TSTF-493, "Clarify Application of Setpoint Methodology for LSSS Functions" (Reference 13) has been implemented, this SR is modified by two Notes as identified in Table 3.3.1-1. The first Note requires evaluation of channel performance for the condition where the as-found setting for the channel setpoint is outside its as-found tolerance but conservative with respect to the Allowable Value.
Evaluation of channel performance will verify that the channel will continue to behave in accordance with safety analysis assumptions and the channel performance assumptions in the setpoint methodology. The purpose of the assessment is to ensure confidence in the channel performance prior to returning the channel to service. For channels determined to be OPERABLE but degraded, after returning the channel to service the performance of these channels will be evaluated under the plant Corrective Action Program. Entry into the Corrective Action Program will ensure required review and documentation of the condition.
The second Note requires that the as-left setting for the channel be returned to within the as-left tolerance of the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT (NTSP). Where a setpoint more conservative than the NTSP is used in the plant surveillance procedures (field setting), the as-left and as-found tolerances, as applicable, will be applied to the surveillance procedure setpoint. This will ensure that sufficient margin to the Safety Limit and/or Analytical Limit is maintained. If the as-left channel setting cannot be returned to a setting within the as-left tolerance of the NTSP, then the Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-46 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued) channel shall be declared inoperable. The second Note also requires that the methodologies for calculating the as-left and the as-found tolerances be in the UFSAR. The NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT definition includes a provision that would allow the as-left setting for the channel to be outside the tolerance band, provided the setting is conservative with respect to the NTSP. This provision is not applicable to Functions for which the second Note applies.
SR 3.3.1.8 SR 3.3.1.8 is the performance of a COT as described in SR 3.3.1.7, except it is modified by a Note that this test shall include verification that the P-6, during the Intermediate Range COT, and P-10, during the Power Range COT, interlocks are in their required state for the existing unit condition. The verification is performed by visual observation of the permissive status light in the unit control room. The Frequency is modified by a Note that allows this surveillance to be satisfied if it has been performed within the Frequency specified in the Surveillance Frequency Control Program or 184 days of the Frequencies prior to reactor startup and four hours after reducing power below P-10 and P-6.
The Frequency of "prior to startup" ensures this surveillance is performed prior to critical operations and applies to the source, intermediate and power range low instrument channels. The Frequency of "4 hours after reducing power below P-10" (applicable to intermediate and power range low channels) and "4 hours after reducing power below P-6" (applicable to source range channels) allows a normal shutdown to be completed and the unit removed from the MODE of Applicability for this surveillance without a delay to perform the testing required by this surveillance. The Frequency thereafter applies if the plant remains in the MODE of Applicability after the initial performances of prior to reactor startup and four hours after reducing power below P-10 or P-6. The MODE of Applicability for this surveillance is < P-10 for the power range low and intermediate range channels and < P-6 for the source range channels.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-47 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
Once the unit is in MODE 3, this surveillance is no longer required. If power is to be maintained < P-10 or < P-6 for more than 4 hours, then the testing required by this surveillance must be performed prior to the expiration of the 4 hour limit. Four hours is a reasonable time to complete the required testing or place the unit in a MODE where this surveillance is no longer required. This test ensures that the NIS source, intermediate, and power range low channels are OPERABLE prior to taking the reactor critical and after reducing power into the applicable MODE (< P-10 or < P-6) for periods > 4 hours. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
For Functions for which TSTF-493, "Clarify Application of Setpoint Methodology for LSSS Functions" (Reference 13) has been implemented, this SR is modified by two Notes as identified in Table 3.3.1-1. The first Note requires evaluation of channel performance for the condition where the as-found setting for the channel setpoint is outside its as-found tolerance but conservative with respect to the Allowable Value.
Evaluation of channel performance will verify that the channel will continue to behave in accordance with safety analysis assumptions and the channel performance assumptions in the setpoint methodology. The purpose of the assessment is to ensure confidence in the channel performance prior to returning the channel to service. For channels determined to be OPERABLE but degraded, after returning the channel to service the performance of these channels will be evaluated under the plant Corrective Action Program. Entry into the Corrective Action Program will ensure required review and documentation of the condition.
The second Note requires that the as-left setting for the channel be returned to within the as-left tolerance of the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT (NTSP). Where a setpoint more conservative than the NTSP is used in the plant surveillance procedures (field setting), the as-left and as-found tolerances, as applicable, will be applied to the surveillance procedure setpoint. This will ensure that sufficient margin to the Safety Limit and/or Analytical Limit is maintained. If the as-left channel setting cannot be returned to a setting within the as-left tolerance of the NTSP, then the channel shall be declared inoperable. The second Note also requires that the methodologies for calculating the as-left and the as-found tolerances be in the UFSAR. The NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT definition includes a provision that would allow the as-left setting for the channel to be outside the tolerance band, provided the setting is conservative with respect to the NTSP. This provision is not applicable to Functions for which the second Note applies.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-48 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
SR 3.3.1.9 SR 3.3.1.9 is the performance of a TADOT and the Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
The SR is modified by a Note that excludes verification of setpoints from the TADOT. Since this SR applies to RCP undervoltage and underfrequency relays, setpoint verification is accomplished during the CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
SR 3.3.1.10 CHANNEL CALIBRATION is a complete check of the instrument loop, including the sensor. The test verifies that the channel responds to a measured parameter within the necessary range and accuracy.
CHANNEL CALIBRATIONS must be performed consistent with the assumptions of the setpoint methodology.
The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
SR 3.3.1.10 is modified by a Note stating that this test shall include verification that the time constants are adjusted to the prescribed values where applicable. The applicable time constants are shown in Table 3.3.1-1.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-49 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
SR 3.3.1.11 SR 3.3.1.11 is the performance of a CHANNEL CALIBRATION, as described in SR 3.3.1.10. Three Notes modify this SR. Note 1 states that neutron detectors are excluded from the CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the power range neutron detectors consists of a normalization of the detectors based on a power calorimetric and flux map performed above 15% RTP. The high voltage detector saturation curve is evaluated and compared to the manufacturer's data.
The Westinghouse-supplied boron triflouride (BF 3) source range neutron detectors and compensated ion chamber intermediate range neutron detectors are being replaced with Thermo Scientific-supplied fission chamber source and intermediate range neutron detectors. The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the BF 3 source range and compensated ion chamber intermediate range neutron detectors consists of obtaining the high voltage detector plateau and discriminator curves for source range, and the high voltage detector plateau for intermediate range, evaluating those curves, and comparing the curves to the manufacturer's data. The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the fission chamber source and intermediate range neutron detectors consists of verifying that the channels respond correctly to test inputs with the necessary range and accuracy. Note 2 states that this Surveillance is not required for the NIS power range detectors for entry into MODE 2 or 1. Note 3 applies to the compensated ion chamber intermediate range neutron detectors, and states that this Surveillance is not required to be performed for entry into MODE 2 or 1. Notes 2 and 3 are required because the unit must be in at least MODE 2 to perform the test for the compensated ion chamber intermediate range detectors and MODE 1 for the power range detectors.
The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-50 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
For Functions for which TSTF-493, "Clarify Application of Setpoint Methodology for LSSS Functions" (Reference 13) has been implemented, this SR is modified by two Notes as identified in Table 3.3.1-1. The first Note requires evaluation of channel performance for the condition where the as-found setting for the channel setpoint is outside its as-found tolerance but conservative with respect to the Allowable Value.
Evaluation of channel performance will verify that the channel will continue to behave in accordance with safety analysis assumptions and the channel performance assumptions in the setpoint methodology. The purpose of the assessment is to ensure confidence in the channel performance prior to returning the channel to service. For channels determined to be OPERABLE but degraded, after returning the channel to service the performance of these channels will be evaluated under the plant Corrective Action Program. Entry into the Corrective Action Program will ensure required review and documentation of the condition.
The second Note requires that the as-left setting for the channel be returned to within the as-left tolerance of the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT (NTSP). Where a setpoint more conservative than the NTSP is used in the plant surveillance procedures (field setting), the as-left and as-found tolerances, as applicable, will be applied to the surveillance procedure setpoint. This will ensure that sufficient margin to the Safety Limit and/or Analytical Limit is maintained. If the as-left channel setting cannot be returned to a setting within the as-left tolerance of the NTSP, then the channel shall be declared inoperable. The second Note also requires that the methodologies for calculating the as-left and the as-found tolerances be in the UFSAR. The NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT definition includes a provision that would allow the as-left setting for the channel to be outside the tolerance band, provided the setting is conservative with respect to the NTSP. This provision is not applicable to Functions for which the second Note applies.
SR 3.3.1.12 SR 3.3.1.12 is the performance of a CHANNEL CALIBRATION, as described in SR 3.3.1.10.
The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-51 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
SR 3.3.1.13 SR 3.3.1.13 is the performance of a COT of RTS interlocks.
The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
SR 3.3.1.14 SR 3.3.1.14 is the performance of a TADOT of the Manual Reactor Trip and the SI Input from ESFAS. The test shall independently verify the OPERABILITY of the undervoltage and shunt trip mechanisms for the Manual Reactor Trip Function for the Reactor Trip Breakers and Reactor Trip Bypass Breakers. The Reactor Trip Bypass Breaker test shall include testing of the automatic undervoltage trip.
The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
The SR is modified by a Note that excludes verification of setpoints from the TADOT. The Functions affected have no setpoints associated with them.
SR 3.3.1.15 SR 3.3.1.15 is the performance of a TADOT of Turbine Trip Functions.
This TADOT is as described in SR 3.3.1.4, except that this test is performed prior to reactor startup. A Note states that this Surveillance is not required if it has been performed within the previous 31 days.
Verification of the Trip Setpoint does not have to be performed for this Surveillance. Performance of this test will ensure that the turbine trip Function is OPERABLE prior to taking the reactor critical.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-52 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
SR 3.3.1.16 and SR 3.3.1.17 SR 3.3.1.16 and SR 3.3.1.17 verify that the individual channel/train actuation response times are less than or equal to the maximum values assumed in the accident analysis. Response time testing acceptance criteria are included in the UFSAR (Ref. 1). Individual component response times are not modeled in the analyses.
The analyses model the overall or total elapsed time, from the point at which the parameter exceeds the trip setpoint value at the sensor to the point at which the equipment reaches the required functional state (i.e.,
control and shutdown rods fully inserted in the reactor core).
For channels that include dynamic transfer Functions (e.g., lag, lead/lag, rate/lag, etc.), the response time test may be performed with the transfer Function set to one, with the resulting measured response time compared to the appropriate UFSAR response time. Alternately, the response time test can be performed with the time constants set to their nominal value, provided the required response time is analytically calculated assuming the time constants are set at their nominal values. The response time may be measured by a series of overlapping tests such that the entire response time is measured.
Response time may be verified by actual response time tests in any series of sequential, overlapping or total channel measurements, or by the summation of allocated sensor, signal processing and actuation logic response times with actual response time tests on the remainder of the channel. Allocations for sensor response times may be obtained from:
(1) historical records based on acceptable response time tests (hydraulic, noise, or power interrupt tests), (2) in place, onsite, or offsite (e.g.
vendor) test measurements, or (3) utilizing vendor engineering specifications. WCAP-13632-P-A Revision 2, "Elimination of Pressure Sensor Response Time Testing Requirements" provides the basis and methodology for using allocated sensor response times in the overall verification of the channel response time for specific sensors identified in the WCAP. In addition, while not specifically identified in the WCAP, ITT Barton 386A and 580A-0 sensors were compared to sensors which were identified. It was concluded that the WCAP results could be applied to these two sensor types as well. Response time verification for other sensor types must be demonstrated by test.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-53 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
WCAP-14036-P-A Revision 1, "Elimination of Periodic Protection Channel Response Time Tests" provides the basis and methodology for using allocated signal processing and actuation logic response times in the overall verification of the protection system channel response time.
The allocations for sensor, signal conditioning and actuation logic response times must be verified prior to placing the component in operational service and re-verified following maintenance that may adversely affect response time. In general, electrical repair work does not impact response time provided the parts used for repair are of the same type and value. Specific components identified in the WCAP may be replaced without verification testing. One example where response time could be affected is replacing the sensing assembly of a transmitter.
The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
SR 3.3.1.16 is modified by a Note stating that neutron detectors are excluded from RTS RESPONSE TIME testing. This Note is necessary because of the difficulty in generating an appropriate detector input signal. Excluding the detectors is acceptable because the principles of detector operation ensure a virtually instantaneous response. The response time of the neutron flux signal portion of the channel shall be measured from detector output or input of the first electronic component in the channel.
REFERENCES
: 1. UFSAR, Chapter 7.
: 2. UFSAR, Chapter 6.
: 3. UFSAR, Chapter 15.
: 4. IEEE-279-1971.
: 5. 10 CFR 50.49.
: 6. 10 CFR 50.36, Technical Specifications, (c)(2)(ii).
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-54 Revision No. 7
RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES REFERENCES (continued)
: 7. WCAP-10271-P-A, Supplement 2, Rev. 1, June 1990.
: 8. WCAP-13632-P-A Revision 2, "Elimination of Pressure Sensor Response Time Testing Requirements" Sep., 1995.
: 9. WCAP-14036-P-A Revision 1, "Elimination of Periodic Protection Channel Response Time Tests" Oct., 1998.
10.10 CFR 50.67.
11.WCAP-14333-P-A, Rev. 1, October 1998.
12.WCAP-15376-P-A, Rev. 1, March 2003.
: 13. Technical Specification Task Force, Improved Standard Technical Specifications Change Traveler, TSTF-493, "Clarify Application of Setpoint Methodology for LSSS Functions" Revision 4.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-55 Revision No. 7
NSWS B 3.7.8 B 3.7 PLANT SYSTEMS B 3.7.8 Nuclear Service Water System (NSWS)
BASES BACKGROUND The NSWS, including Lake Wylie and the Standby Nuclear Service Water Pond (SNSWP), provides a heat sink for the removal of process and operating heat from safety related components during a Design Basis Accident (DBA) or transient. During normal operation, and a normal shutdown, the NSWS also provides this function for various safety related and nonsafety related components. The safety related function is covered by this LCO.
The NSWS consists of two independent loops (A and B) of essential equipment, each of which is shared between units. Each loop contains two NSWS pumps, each of which is supplied from a separate emergency diesel generator. Each set of two pumps supplies two trains (1A and 2A, or 1 B and 2B) of essential equipment through common discharge piping.
While the pumps are unit designated, i.e., 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, all pumps receive automatic start signals from a safety injection or blackout signal from either unit. Therefore, a pump designated to one unit will supply post accident cooling to equipment in that loop 'on both units, provided its associated emergency diesel generator is available. For example, the 1A NSWS pump, supplied by emergency diesel 1A, will supply post accident cooling to NSWS trains 1A and 2A.
One NSWS loop containing two OPERABLE NSWS pumps has sufficient capacity to supply post loss of coolant accident (LOCA) loads on one unit and shutdown and cooldown loads on the other unit. Thus, the OPERABILITY of two NSWS loops assures that no single failure will keep the system from performing the required safety function.
Additionally, one NSWS loop containing one OPERABLE NSWS pump has sufficient capacity to maintain one unit indefinitely in MODE 5 (commencing 36 hours following a trip from RTP) while supplying the post LOCA loads of the other unit. Thus, after a unit has been placed in MODE 5, only one NSWS pump and its associated emergency diesel generator are required to be OPERABLE on each loop, in order for the system to be capable of performing its required safety function, including single failure considerations.
Additional information about the design and operation of the NSWS, along with a list of the components served, is presented in the UFSAR, Section 9.2.1 (Ref. 1). The principal safety related function of the NSWS is the removal of decay heat from the reactor via the CCW System.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.8-1 Revision No. 4
NSWS B 3.7.8 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES The design basis of the NSWS is for one NSWS train, in conjunction with the CCW System and a containment spray system, to remove core decay heat following a design basis LOCA as discussed in the UFSAR, Section 6.2 (Ref. 2). This prevents the containment sump fluid from increasing in temperature during the recirculation phase following a LOCA and provides for a gradual reduction in the temperature of this fluid as it is supplied to the Reactor Coolant System by the ECCS pumps.
The NSWS is designed to perform its function with a single failure of any active component, assuming the loss of offsite power.
The NSWS, in conjunction with the CCW System, also cools the unit from residual heat removal (RHR), as discussed in the UFSAR, Section 5.4 (Ref. 3), from RHR entry conditions to MODE 5 during normal and post accident operations. The time required for this evolution is a function of the number of CCW and RHR System trains that are operating. Thirty six hours after a trip from RTP, one NSWS train is sufficient to remove decay heat during subsequent operations in MODES 5 and 6. This assumes a maximum NSWS temperature, a simultaneous design basis event on the other unit, and the loss of offsite power.
The NSWS satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36 (Ref. 4).
LCO Two NSWS trains are required to be OPERABLE to provide the required redundancy to ensure that the system functions to remove post accident heat loads, assuming that the worst case single active failure occurs coincident with the loss of offsite power.
While the NSWS is operating in the normal dual supply header alignment, an NSWS train is considered OPERABLE during MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4 when:
: a.
: 1.
Both NSWS pumps on the NSWS loop are OPERABLE; or
: 2.
One unit's NSWS pump is OPERABLE and one unit's flowpath to the non essential header, AFW pumps, and Containment Spray heat exchangers are isolated (or equivalent flow restrictions); and
: b.
The associated piping, valves, and instrumentation and controls required to perform the safety related function are OPERABLE.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.8-2 Revision No'. 4
NSWS B 3.7.8 BASES LCO (continued)
While the NSWS is operating in the single supply header alignment, one of the supply headers is removed from service in support of planned maintenance or modification activities associated with the supply header that is taken out of service. In this configuration, each NSWS train is considered OPERABLE with the required NSWS flow to safety related equipment being fed through the remaining OPERABLE NSWS supply header. While the NSWS is operating in the single supply header alignment, an NSWS train is considered OPERABLE during MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4 when:
: a.
The associated train related NSWS pumps are OPERABLE; and
: b.
The associated piping (except for the supply header that is taken out of service), valves, and instrumentation and controls required to perform the safety related function are OPERABLE.
The NSWS system is shared between the two units. The shared portions of the system must be OPERABLE for each unit when that unit is in the MODE of Applicability. Additionally, both normal and emergency power for shared components must also be OPERABLE. If a shared NSWS component becomes inoperable, or normal or emergency power to shared components becomes inoperable, then the Required Actions of this LCO must be entered independently for each unit that is in the MODE of applicability of the LCO, except as noted in a.2 above for operation in the normal dual supply header alignment. In this case, sufficient flow is available, however, this configuration results in inoperabilities within other required systems on one unit and the associated Required Actions must be entered. Use of a NSWS pump and associated diesel generator on a shutdown unit to support continued operation (> 72 hours) of a unit with an inoperable NSWS pump is prohibited. A shutdown unit supplying its associated emergency power source (1 EMXG/2EMXH) cannot be credited for OPERABILITY of components supporting the operating unit.
APPLICABILITY In MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4, the NSWS is a normally operating system that is required to support the OPERABILITY of the equipment serviced by the NSWS and required to be OPERABLE in these MODES.
In MODES 5 and 6, the requirements of the NSWS are determined by the systems it supports.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.8-3 Revision No. 4
NSWS B 3.7.8 BASES ACTIONS A. 1 If one NSWS train is inoperable, action must be taken to restore OPERABLE status within 72 hours. In this Condition, the remaining OPERABLE NSWS train is adequate to perform the heat removal function. However, the overall reliability is reduced because a single failure in the OPERABLE NSWS train could result in loss of NSWS function. Due to the shared nature of the NSWS, both units are required to enter a 72 hour Action when a NSWS Train becomes inoperable on either unit. Required Action A.1 is modified by two Notes. The first Note indicates that the applicable Conditions and Required Actions of LCO 3.8.1, "AC Sources-Operating," should be entered if an inoperable NSWS train results in an inoperable emergency diesel generator. The second Note indicates that the applicable Conditions and Required Actions of LCO 3.4.6, "RCS Loops-MODE 4," should be entered if an inoperable NSWS train results in an inoperable decay heat removal train (RHR). An example of when these Notes should be applied is with both units' loop 'A' NSWS pumps inoperable, both units' 'A' emergency diesel generators and both units' 'A' RHR systems should be declared inoperable and appropriate Actions entered. This is an exception to LCO 3.0.6 and ensures the proper actions are taken for these components. The 72 hour Completion Time is based on the redundant capabilities afforded by the OPERABLE train; and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this time period.
B.1 If one NSWS supply header is inoperable due to the NSWS being aligned for single supply header operation, the NSWS supply header must be restored to OPERABLE status within 30 days. Dual supply header operation is the normal alignment of the NSWS. The Completion Time of 30 days is supported by probabilistic risk analysis. While in Condition B, the single supply header is adequate to perform the heat removal function for all required safety related equipment for both safety trains.
Due to the shared nature of the NSWS, both units are required to enter this Condition when the NSWS is aligned for single supply header operation. In order to prevent the potential for NSWS pump runout, the single NSWS pump flow balance alignment is prohibited while the NSWS is aligned for single supply header operation.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.8-4 Revision No. 4
NSWS B 3.7.8 BASES ACTIONS (continued)
Condition B is modified by three Notes. Note 1 states that entry into this Condition shall only be allowed for pre-planned activities as described in the Bases of this Specification. Condition B is only allowed to be entered in support of planned maintenance or modification activities associated with the supply header that is taken out of service. An example of a situation for which entry into this Condition is allowed is refurbishment of a supply header. Entry into this Condition is not allowed in response to unplanned events or for other events involving the NSWS. Examples of situations for which entry into this Condition is prohibited are emergent repair of discovered piping leaks and other component failures. For unplanned events or oth-erevents involving the NSWS, Condition A must be entered. Note 2 requires immediate entry into Condition A of this LCO if one or more NSWS components become inoperable while in this Condition and one NSWS train remains OPERABLE. With one remaining OPERABLE NSWS train, the NSWS can still perform its safety related function. However, with one inoperable NSWS train, the NSWS cannot be assured of performing its safety related function in the event of a single failure of another NSWS component. The most limiting single failure is the failure of an NSWS pit to automatically transfer from Lake Wylie to the SNSWP during a seismic event. While the loss of any NSWS component subject to the requirements of this LCO can result in the entry into Condition A, the most common example is the inoperability of an NSWS pump. This occurs during periodic testing of the emergency diesel generators. Inoperability of an emergency diesel generator renders its associated NSWS pump inoperable. Note 3 requires immediate entry into LCO 3.0.3 if one or more NSWS components become inoperable while in this Condition and no NSWS train remains OPERABLE. In this case, the NSWS cannot perform its safety related function.
C.1 and C.2 If the NSWS train cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the associated Completion Time, or if the NSWS supply header cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the associated Completion Time, the unit must be placed in a MODE in which the LCO does not apply. To achieve this status, the unit must be placed in at least MODE 3 within 6 hours and in MODE 5 within 36 hours.
The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.8-5 Revision No. 4
NSWS B 3.7.8 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.7.8.1 REQUIREMENTS This SR is modified by a Note indicating that the isolation of the NSWS components or systems may render those components inoperable, but does not affect the OPERABILITY of the NSWS.
Verifying the correct alignment for manual, power operated, and automatic valves in the NSWS flow path provides assurance that the proper flow paths exist for NSWS operation. This SR does not apply to valves that are locked, sealed, or otherwise secured in position, since they are verified to be in the correct position prior to being locked, sealed, or secured. This SR does not require any testing or valve manipulation; rather, it involves verification that those valves capable of being mispositioned are in the correct position. This SR does not apply to valves that cannot be inadvertently misaligned, such as check valves.
The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
SR 3.7.8.2 This SR verifies proper automatic operation of the NSWS valves on an actual or simulated actuation signal. The signals that cause the actuation are from Safety Injection and Phase 'B' isolation. The NSWS is a normally operating system that cannot be fully actuated as part of normal testing. This Surveillance is not required for valves that are locked, sealed, or otherwise secured in the required position under administrative controls. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
This SR is modified by a Note that states that the SR is not required to be met for valves that are maintained in position to support NSWS single supply header operation. When the NSWS is placed in this alignment, certain automatic valves in the system are maintained in position and will not automatically reposition in response to an actuation signal while the NSWS is in this alignment.
Catawba Units 1 and 2
-B 3.7.8-6 Revision No. 4,
NSWS B 3.7.8 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
SR 3.7.8.3 This SR verifies proper automatic operation of the NSWS pumps on an actual or simulated actuation signal. The signals that cause the actuation are from Safety Injection and Loss of Offsite Power. The NSWS is a normally operating system that cannot be fully actuated as part of normal testing during normal operation. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
REFERENCES
: 1.
UFSAR, Section 9.2.
: 2.
UFSAR, Section 6.2.
: 3.
UFSAR, Section 5.4.
: 4.
10 CFR 50.36, Technical Specifications, (c)(2)(ii).
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.8-7 Revision*No. 4
CRAVS B 3.7.10 B 3.7 PLANT SYSTEMS B 3.7.10 Control Room Area Ventilation System (CRAVS)
BASES BACKGROUND The CRAVS ensures that the Control Room Envelope (CRE) will remain habitable for occupants during and following all credible accident conditions. This function is accomplished by pressurizing the CRE to >
1/8 (0.125) inch water gauge with respect to all surrounding areas, filtering the outside air used for pressurization, and filtering a portion of the return air from the CRE to clean up the control room environment.
The CRAVS consists of two independent, redundant trains of equipment.
Each train consists of:
a pressurizing filter train fan (1 CRA-PFTF-1 or 2CRA-PFTF-1) a filter unit (1CRA-PFT-1 or 2CRA-PFT-1) which includes moisture separator/prefilters, HEPA filters, and carbon adsorbers the associated ductwork, dampers/valves, controls, doors, and barriers Inherent in the CRAVS ability to pressurize the control room is the control room envelope boundary. The CRE is the area within the confines of the CRE boundary that contains the spaces that control room occupants inhabit to control the unit during normal and accident conditions. This area encompasses the control room, and may encompass the non-critical areas to which frequent personnel access or continuous occupancy is not necessary in the event of an accident. The CRE is protected during the normal operation, natural events, and accident conditions. The CRE boundary is the combination of walls, floor, roof, ducting, doors, penetrations and equipment that physically form the CRE. The OPERABILITY of the CRE boundary must be maintained to ensure that the inleakage of unfiltered air into the CRE will not exceed the inleakage assumed in the licensing basis analysis of design basis accident (DBA) consequences to CRE occupants. The CRE and its boundary are defined in the Control Room Envelope Habitability Program. These boundaries must be intact or properly isolated for the CRAVS to function properly.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7. 10-1 Revision No. 10
CRAVS B 3.7.10 BASES BACKGROUND (continued)
The CRAVS can be operated either manually or automatically. Key operated selector switches located in the CRE initiate operation of all train related CRAVS equipment. The selected train is in continuous operation. Outside air for pressurization and makeup to the CRE is supplied from two independent intakes. This outside air is mixed with return air from the CRE before being passed through the filter unit. In the filter unit, moisture separator/prefilters remove any large particles in the air, and any entrained water droplets present. A HEPA filter bank upstream of the carbon adsorber filter bank functions to remove particulates and a second bank of HEPA filters follow the carbon adsorber to collect carbon fines. Only the upstream HEPA filters and carbon adsorber bank are credited in the analysis. A heater is included within each filter train to reduce the relative humidity of the airstream, although no credit is taken in the safety analysis. The heaters are not required for OPERABILITY since the carbon laboratory tests are performed at 95% relative humidity, but have been maintained in the system to provide additional margin (Ref. 9). Continuous operation of each train for at least 10 hours per month, with the heaters on, reduces moisture buildup on the HEPA filters and adsorbers.
Upon receipt of an Engineered Safety Feature (ESF) signal, the selected CRAVS train continues to operate and the pressurizing filter train fan of the non-selected train is started. This assures control room pressurization, assuming an active failure of one of the pressurizing filter train fans.
The outside air for pressurization is continuously monitored for the presence of smoke, radiation, or chlorine by non-safety related detectors.
If smoke, radiation, or chlorine is detected in an outside air intake, an alarm is received within the CRE, alerting the operators of this condition.
The operator will take the required action to close the affected intake, if necessary, per the guidance of the Annunciator Response Procedures.
A single CRAVS train is capable of pressurizing the CRE to greater than or equal to 0.125 inches water gauge. The CRAVS is designed in accordance with Seismic Category 1 requirements. The CRAVS operation in maintaining the CRE habitable is discussed in the UFSAR, Sections 6.4 and 9.4.1 (Refs. 1 and 2).
The CRAVS is designed to maintain a habitable environment in the CRE for 30 days of continuous occupancy after a DBA without exceeding a 5 rem total effective dose equivalent (TEDE).
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.10-2 Revision No. 10
CRAVS B 3.7.10 BASES APPLICABLE The CRAVS components are arranged in redundant, safety related SAFETY ANALYSES ventilation trains. The CRAVS provides airborne radiological protection for the CRE occupants, as demonstrated by the CRE occupant dose analyses for the most limiting design basis loss of coolant accident, fission product release presented in the UFSAR, Chapter 15 (Ref. 3).
The CRAVS provides protection from smoke and hazardous chemicals to CRE occupants. The analysis of hazardous chemical releases demonstrates that the toxicity limits are not exceeded in the CRE following a hazardous chemical release (Ref. 1). The evaluation of a smoke challenge demonstrates that it will not result in the inability of the CRE occupants to control the reactor either from the control room or from the remote shutdown panels (Ref. 9).
The worst case single active failure of a component of the CRAVS, assuming a loss of offsite power, does not impair the ability of the system to perform its design function.
The CRAVS satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36 (Ref. 4).
LCO Two independent and redundant CRAVS trains are required to be OPERABLE to ensure that at least one is available assuming a single active failure disables the other train. Total system failure, such as from a loss of both ventilation trains or from an inoperable CRE boundary, could result in exceeding a dose of 5 rem to the CRE occupants in the event of a large radioactive release.
Each CRAVS train is considered OPERABLE when the individual components necessary to limit CRE occupant exposure are OPERABLE in both trains. A CRAVS train is OPERABLE when the associated:
: a.
Pressurizing filter train fan is OPERABLE;
: b.
HEPA filters and carbon adsorbers are not excessively restricting flow, and are capable of performing their filtration functions; and
: c.
Ductwork, valves, and dampers are OPERABLE, and air circulation can be maintained.
In order for the CRAVS trains to be considered OPERABLE, the CRE boundary must be maintained such that the CRE occupant dose from a large radioactive release does not exceed the calculated dose in the licensing basis consequence analyses for DBAs, and that the CRE occupants are protected from hazardous chemicals and smoke.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.10-3 Revision No. 10
CRAVS B 3.7.10 BASES LCO (continued)
The CRAVS is shared between the two units. The system must be OPERABLE for each unit when that unit is in the MODE of Applicability.
Additionally, both normal and emergency power must also be OPERABLE because the system is shared. A shutdown unit supplying its associated emergency power source (1 EMXG/2EMXH) cannot be credited for OPERABILITY of components supporting the operating unit.
If a CRAVS component becomes inoperable, or normal or emergency power to a CRAVS component becomes inoperable, then the Required Actions of this LCO must be entered independently for each unit that is in the MODE of Applicability of the LCO.
The LCO is modified by a Note allowing the CRE boundary to be opened intermittently under administrative controls. This Note only applies to openings in the CRE boundary that can be rapidly restored to the design condition, such as doors, hatches, floor plugs, and access panels. For entry and exit through doors, the administrative control of the opening is performed by the person(s) entering or exiting the area. For other openings, these controls should be proceduralized and consist of stationing a dedicated individual at the opening who is in continuous communication with the operators in the CRE. This individual will have a method to rapidly close the opening and to restore the CRE boundary to a condition equivalent to the design condition when a need for CRE isolation is indicated.
APPLICABILITY In MODES 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the CRAVS must be OPERABLE to ensure that the CRE will remain habitable during and following a DBA.
During movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, the CRAVS must be OPERABLE to cope with the release from a fuel handling accident.
ACTIONS A. 1 When one CRAVS train is inoperable for reasons other than an inoperable CRE boundary, action must be taken to restore OPERABLE status within 7 days. In this Condition, the remaining OPERABLE CRAVS train is adequate to perform the CRE protection function.
However, the overall reliability is reduced because a single failure in the-OPERABLE CRAVS train could result in loss of CRAVS function. The 7 day Completion Time is based on the low probability of a DBA occurring during this time period, and ability of the remaining train to provide the required capability.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.10-4 Revision No. 10
CRAVS B 3.7.10 BASES ACTIONS (continued)
B.1, B.2, and B.3 If the unfiltered inleakage of potentially contaminated air past the CRE boundary and into the CRE can result in CRE occupant radiological dose greater than the calculated dose of the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences (allowed to be up to 5 rem TEDE), or inadequate protection of CRE occupants from hazardous chemicals or smoke, the CRE boundary is inoperable. Actions must be taken to restore an OPERABLE CRE boundary within 90 days.
During the period that the CRE boundary is considered inoperable, action must be initiated to implement mitigating actions to lessen the effect on CRE occupants from the potential hazards of a radiological or chemical event or a challenge from smoke. Actions must be taken within 24 hours to verify that in the event of a DBA, the mitigating actions will ensure that CRE occupant radiological exposures will not exceed the calculated dose of the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences, and that CRE occupants are protected from hazardous chemicals and smoke. These mitigating actions (i.e., actions that are taken to offset the consequences of the inoperable CRE boundary) should be preplanned for implementation upon entry into the condition, regardless of whether entry is intentional or unintentional. The 24 hour Completion Time is reasonable based on the low probability of a DBA occurring during this time period, and the use of mitigating actions. The 90 day Completion Time is reasonable based on the determination that the mitigating actions will ensure protection of CRE occupants within analyzed limits while limiting the probability that CRE occupants will have to implement protective measures that may adversely affect their ability to control the reactor and maintain it in a safe shutdown condition in the event of a DBA. In addition, the 90 day Completion Time is reasonable time to diagnose, plan and possibly repair, and test most problems with the CRE boundary.
C.1 and C.2 In MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, if the inoperable CRAVS or CRE boundary train cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the required Completion Time, the unit must be placed in a MODE that minimizes accident risk.
To achieve this status, the unit must be placed in at least MODE 3 within 6 hours, and in MODE 5 within 36 hours. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.1.-.10-5 Revision No. 10
CRAVS B 3.7.10 BASES ACTIONS (continued)
D.1 In MODE 5 or 6, if the inoperable CRAVS train cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the required Completion Time, or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, action must be taken to immediately place the OPERABLE CRAVS train in operation. This action ensures that the operating (or running) train is OPERABLE, that no failures preventing automatic actuation will occur, and that any active failure would be readily detected.
An alternative to Required Action D.1 is to immediately suspend activities that could result in a release of radioactivity that might require isolation of the CRE. This places the unit in a condition that minimizes risk. This does not preclude the movement of fuel to a safe position.
E.1 In MODE 5 or 6, or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, with two CRAVS trains inoperable, or with one or more CRAVS trains inoperable due to an inoperable CRE boundary, action must be taken immediately to suspend activities that could result in a release of radioactivity that might require isolation of the CRE. This places the unit in a condition that minimizes the accident risk. This does not preclude the movement of fuel to a safe position.
F. 1 If both CRAVS trains are inoperable in MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, for reasons other than Condition B, the CRAVS may not be capable of performing the intended function and the unit is in a condition outside the accident analyses. Therefore, LCO 3.0.3 must be entered immediately.
G.1 and G.2 With one or more CRAVS heaters inoperable, the heater must be restored to OPERABLE status within 7 days. Alternatively, a report must be initiated per Specification 5.6.6, which details the reason for the heater's inoperability and the corrective action required to return the heater to OPERABLE status.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.10-6 Revision No. 10
* CRAVS B 3.7.10 BASES ACTIONS (continued)
The heaters do not affect OPERABILITY of the CRAVS filter trains because carbon adsorber efficiency testing is performed at 30'C and 95% relative humidity. The accident analysis shows that site boundary and control room operator radiation doses are within 10 CFR 50.67 limits during a DBA LOCA under these conditions.
SURVEILLANCE SR 3.7.10.1 REQUIREMENTS Standby systems should be checked periodically to ensure that they function properly. As the environment and normal operating conditions on this system are not too severe, testing each train once every month provides an adequate check of this system. Monthly heater operations dry out any moisture accumulated in the carbon from humidity in the ambient air. Systems with heaters must be operated from the control room for _> 10 continuous hours with the heaters energized and flow through the HEPA filters and carbon adsorbers. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
SR 3.7.10.2 This SR verifies that the required CRAVS testing is performed in accordance with the Ventilation Filter Testing Program (VFTP). The CRAVS filter tests are in accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.52 (Ref. 5).
The VFTP includes testing the performance of the HEPA filter and carbon adsorber efficiencies and the physical properties of the activated carbon.
Specific test Frequencies and additional information are discussed in detail in the VFTP.
SR 3.7.10.3 This SR verifies that each CRAVS train starts and operates on an actual or simulated actuation signal. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
Catawba*Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.10-7 Revision No. 10
CRAVS B 3.7.10 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
SR 3.7.10.4 This SR verifies the OPERABILITY of the CRE boundary by testing for unfiltered air inleakage past the CRE boundary and into the CRE. The details of the testing are specified in the Control Room Envelope Habitability Program.
The CRE is considered habitable when the radiological dose to CRE occupants calculated in the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences is no more than 5 rem TEDE and the CRE occupants are protected from hazardous chemicals and smoke. This SR verifies that the unfiltered air inleakage into the CRE is no greater than the flow rate assumed in the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences. When unfiltered air inleakage is greater than the assumed flow rate, Condition B must be entered. Required Action B.3 allows time to restore the CRE boundary to OPERABLE status provided mitigating actions can ensure that the CRE remains within the licensing basis habitability limits for the occupants following an accident. Compensatory measures are discussed in Regulatory Guide 1.196, Section C.2.7.3 (Ref. 9), which endorses, with exceptions, NEI 99-03, Section 8.4 and Appendix F (Ref. 7). These compensatory measures may also be used as mitigating actions as required by Required Action B.2. Temporary analytical methods may also be used as compensatory measures to restore OPERABILITY (Ref.
8). Options for restoring the CRE boundary to OPERABLE status include changing the licensing basis DBA consequence analysis, repairing the CRE boundary, or a combination of these actions. Depending upon the nature of the problem and the corrective action, a full scope inleakage test may not be necessary to establish that the CRE boundary has been restored to OPERABLE status.
REFERENCES
: 1.
UFSAR, Section 6.4.
: 2.
UFSAR, Section 9.4.1.
: 3.
UFSAR, Chapter 15.
: 4.
10 CFR 50.36, Technical Specifications, (c)(2)(ii).
: 5.
Regulatory Guide 1.52, Rev. 2.
: 6.
Catawba Nuclear Station License Amendments 90/84 for Units 1/2, August 23, 1991.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.10-8 Revision No. 10
CRAVS B 3.7.10 BASES REFERENCES (continued)
: 7.
NEI 99-03, "Control Room Habitability Assessment", June 2001.
: 8.
Letter from Eric J. Leeds (NRC) to James W. Davis (NEI) dated January 30, 2004, "NEI Draft White Paper, Use of Generic Letter 91-18 Process and Alternative Source Terms in the Context of Control Room Habitability", (ADAMS Accession No. ML040300694).
: 9.
Regulatory Guide 1.196, Rev. 1.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.10-9 Revision No. 10
CRACWS B 3.7.11 B 3.7 PLANT SYSTEMS B 3.7.11 Control Room Area Chilled Water System (CRACWS)
BASES BACKGROUND The CRACWS provides temperature control for the control room and the control room area.
The CRACWS consists of two independent and redundant trains that provide cooling to the control room and control room area. Each train consists of a chiller package, chilled water pump, and air handling units with cooling coils. Chilled water is passed through the cooling coils of the air handling unit to cool the air. Electric duct heaters are then used to control the supply air temperature.
The CRACWS provides both normal and emergency cooling to the control room and control room area. A single train will provide the required temperature control to maintain the control room approximately 740F. The CRACWS operation in maintaining the control room temperature is discussed in the UFSAR, Section 9.4 (Ref. 1).
APPLICABLE The design basis of the CRACWS is to maintain the control room SAFETY ANALYSES temperature for 30 days of continuous occupancy.
The CRACWS components are arranged in redundant, safety related trains. During emergency operation, the CRACWS maintains the temperature between 72 0F and 850F. A single active failure of a component of the CRACWS, with a loss of offsite power, does not impair the ability of the system to perform its design function. Redundant detectors and controls are provided for control room temperature control.
The CRACWS is designed in accordance with Seismic Category I requirements. The CRACWS is capable of removing sensible and latent heat loads from the control room, which include consideration of equipment heat loads and personnel occupancy requirements, to ensure equipment OPERABILITY.
The CRACWS satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36 (Ref. 2).
Catawba Units 1 and 2
.B 3.7. 11 -1 Revision No. 3
CRACWS B 3.7.11 BASES LCO Two independent and redundant trains of the CRACWS are required to be OPERABLE to ensure that at least one is available, assuming a single failure disabling the other train. Total system failure could result in the equipment operating temperature exceeding limits in the event of an accident.
The CRACWS is considered to be OPERABLE when the individual components necessary to maintain the control room temperature are OPERABLE in both trains. These components include a chiller package, chilled water pump, and air handling unit. In addition, the CRACWS must be OPERABLE to the extent that air circulation can be maintained.
The CRACWS is shared between the two units. The system must be OPERABLE for each unit when that unit is in the MODE of Applicability.
Additionally, both normal and emergency power must also be OPERABLE because the system is shared. A shutdown unit supplying its associated emergency power source (1EMXG/2EMXH) cannot be credited for OPERABILITY of components supporting the operating unit.
If a CRACWS component becomes inoperable, or normal or emergency power to a CRACWS component becomes inoperable, then the Required Actions of this LCO must be entered independently for each unit that is in the MODE of applicability of the LCO.
APPLICABILITY In MODES 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and during movement of recently
.irradiated fuel assemblies, the CRACWS must be OPERABLE to ensure that the control room temperature will not exceed equipment operational requirements following a design basis accident. The CRACWS is only required to be OPERABLE during fuel handling involving handling recently irradiated fuel (i.e., fuel that has occupied part of a critical reactor core within the previous 72 hours) due to radioactive decay.
ACTIONS A.1 With one CRACWS train inoperable, action must be taken to restore OPERABLE status within 30 days. In this Condition, the remaining OPERABLE CRACWS train is adequate to maintain the control room temperature within limits. However, the overall reliability is reduced because a single failure in the OPERABLE CRACWS train could result in loss of CRACWS function. The 30 day Completion Time is based on the low probability of an event, the consideration that the remaining train can provide the required protection, and that alternate safety or nonsafety related cooling means are available.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.11-2 Revision No. 3
CRACWS B 3.7.11 BASES ACTIONS (continued)
B.1 and B.2 In MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, if the inoperable CRACWS train cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the required Completion Time, the unit must be placed in a MODE that minimizes the risk. To achieve this status, the unit must be placed in at least MODE 3 within 6 hours, and in MODE 5 within 36 hours. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
C.1 and C.2 In MODE 5 or 6, or during movement of recently irradiated fuel, if the inoperable CRACWS train cannot be restored to OPERABLE sta.h,,s within the required Completion Time, the OPERABLE CRACWS train must be placed in operation immediately. This action ensures that the remaining train is OPERABLE, and that active failures will be readily detected.
An alternative to Required Action C. 1 is to immediately suspend activities that present a potential for releasing radioactivity. This places the unit in a condition that minimizes accident risk. This does not preclude the movement of fuel to a safe position.
p-l-In MODE 5 or 6, or during movement of recently irradiated fuel assemblies, with two CRACWS trains inoperable, action must be taken immediately to suspend activities that could result in a release of radioactivity. This places the unit in a condition that minimizes risk. This does not preclude the movement of fuel to a safe position.
E.1 If both CRACWS trains are inoperable in MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, the.ontrol room CRACWS may not be capable of performing its intended function.
Therefore, LCO 3.0.3 must be entered immediately.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.11-3 Revision No. 3
CRACWS B 3.7.11 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.7.11.1 REQUIREMENTS This SR verifies that the heat removal capability of the system is sufficient to maintain the temperature in the control room at or below 901F. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
REFERENCES
: 1.
UFSAR, Section 9.4.
: 2.
10 CFR 50.36, Technical Specifications, (c)(2)(ii).
: 3.
10 CFR 50.67, Accident source term.
: 4.
Regulatory Guide 1.183, Revision 0.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.11-4 Revision No. 3
ABFVES B 3.7.12 B 3.7 PLANT SYSTEMS B 3.7.12 Auxiliary Building Filtered Ventilation Exhaust System (ABFVES)
BASES BACKGROUND The ABFVES normally filters air exhausted from all potentially contaminated areas of the auxiliary building, which includes the Emergency Core Cooling System (ECCS) pump rooms and non safety portions of the auxiliary building. The ABFVES, in conjunction with other normally operating systems, also provides ventilation for these areas of the auxiliary building.
The ABFVES consists of two independent and redundant trains. Each train consists of a heater demister section and a filter unit section. The heater demister section consists of a prefilter/moisture separator (to remove entrained water droplets) and an electric heater (to reduce the relative humidity of air entering the filter unit). The filter unit section consists of a prefilter, an upstream HEPA filter, an activated carbon adsorber (for the removal of gaseous activity, principally iodines), a downstream HEPA, and a fan. The downstream HEPA filter is not credited in the accident analysis, but serves to collect carbon fines.
Ductwork, valves or dampers, and instrumentation also form part of the system. Following receipt of a safety injection (SI) signal, the system isolates non safety portions of the ABFVES and exhausts air only from the ECCS pump rooms.
The ABFVES is normally aligned to bypass the system HEPA filters and carbon adsorbers. During emergency operations, the ABFVES dampers are realigned to the filtered position, and fans are started to begin filtration. During emergency operations, the ABFVES dampers are realigned to isolate the non-safety portions of the system and only draw air from the ECCS pump rooms, as well as the Elevation 522 pipe chase, and Elevation 543 and 560 mechanical penetration rooms.
The ABFVES is discussed in the UFSAR, Sections 6.5, 9.4, 14.4, and 15.6 (Refs. 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively) since it may be used for normal, as well as post accident, atmospheric cleanup functions. The heaters are not required for OPERABILITY, since the laboratory test of the carbon is performed at 95% relative humidity, but have been maintained in the system to provide additional margin (Ref. 9).
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.12-1 Revision No. 5
ABFVES B 3.7.12 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES The design basis of the ABFVES is established by the large break LOCA. The system evaluation assumes a constant leak rate of 0.5 gpm in the ECCS pump rooms and a constant leak rate of 0.5 gpm outside the ECCS pump rooms throughout the accident. In such a case, the system limits radioactive release to within the 10 CFR 50.67 (Ref. 6) limits. The analysis of the effects and consequences of a large break LOCA is presented in Reference 4.
The ABFVES satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36 (Ref. 7).
LCO Two independent and redundant trains of the ABFVES are required to be OPERABLE to ensure that at least one is available, assuming that a single failure disables the other train coincident with a loss of offsite power. Total system failure could result in the atmospheric release from the ECCS pump rooms exceeding 10 CFR 50.67 limits in the event of a Design Basis Accident (DBA).
ABFVES is considered OPERABLE when the individual components necessary to maintain the ECCS pump rooms filtration are OPERABLE in both trains.
An ABFVES train is considered OPERABLE when its associated:
: a.
Fan is OPERABLE;
: b.
HEPA filters and carbon adsorbers are capable of performing their filtration functions; and
: c.
Ductwork, valves, and dampers are OPERABLE and air circulation can be maintained.
The ABFVES fans power supply is provided by buses which are shared between the two units. A shutdown unit supplying its associated emergency power source (1 EMXG/2EMXH) cannot be credited for OPERABILITY of components supporting the operating unit. If normal or emergency power to the ABFVES becomes inoperable, then the Required Actions of this LCO must be entered independently for each unit that is in the MODE of applicability of the LCO.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.12-2 ReVision No. 5
ABFVES B 3.7.12 BASES LCO (continued)
The LCO is modified by a Note allowing the ECCS pump rooms pressure boundary to be opened intermittently under administrative controls. For entry and exit through doors, the administrative control of the opening is performed by the person(s) entering or exiting the area. For other openings, these controls consist of stationing a dedicated individual at the opening who is in continuous communication with the control room. This individual will have a method to rapidly close the opening when a need for ECCS pump rooms pressure boundary isolation is indicated.
APPLICABILITY In MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4, the ABFVES is required to be OPERABLE consistent with the OPERABILITY requirements of the ECCS.
In MODE 5 or 6, the ABFVES is not required to be OPERABLE since the ECCS is not required to be OPERABLE.
ACTIONS A. 1 With ort ABFVFS train inoperable, action must be taken-to restore OPERABLE status within 7 days. During this time, the remaining OPERABLE train is adequate to perform the ABFVES function.
The 7 day Completion Time is appropriate because the risk contribution is less than that for the ECCS (72 hour Completion Time), and this system is not a direct support system for the ECCS. The 7 day Completion Time is based on the low probability of a DBA occurring during this time period, and ability of the remaining train to provide the required capability.
Concurrent failure of two ABFVES trains would result in the loss of functional capability; therefore, LCO 3.0.3 must be entered immediately.
B. 1 If the ECCS pump rooms pressure boundary is inoperable such that the ABFVES trains cannot establish or maintain the required pressure, action must be taken to restore an OPERABLE ECCS pump rooms pressure boundary within 24 hours. During the period that the ECCS pump rooms pressure boundary is inoperable, appropriate compensatory ra.ures (consistent with the intent, as applicable, of GDC 19, 60, 64, and 10 CFR 50.67) should be utilized to protect plant personnel from potential Catawba Units 1 and 2 R 57.12-3 Revision No. 5
ABFVES B. 3.7.12 BASES ACTIONS (continued) hazards such as radioactive contamination, toxic chemicals, smoke, temperature and relative humidity, and physical security. Preplanned measures should be available to address these concerns for intentional and unintentional entry into the condition. The 24 hour Completion Time is reasonable based on the low probability of a DBA occurring during this time period and the use of compensatory measures. The 24 hour Completion Time is a typically reasonable time to diagnose, plan and possibly repair, and test most problems with the ECCS pump rooms pressure boundary.
C.1 and C.2 If the ABFVES train or ECCS pump rooms pressure boundary cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the associated Completion Time, the unit must be placed in a MODE in which the LCO does not apply. To achieve this status, the unit must be placed in at least MODE 3 within 6 hours, and in MODE 5 within 36 hours. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
D.1 and D.2 With one or more ABFVES heaters inoperable, the heater must be restored to OPERABLE status within 7 days. Alternatively, a report must be initiated per Specification 5.6.6, which details the reason for the heater's inoperability and the corrective action required to return the heater to OPERABLE status.
The heaters do not affect OPERABILITY of the ABFVES filter trains because carbon adsorber efficiency testing is performed at 30 0C and 95% relative humidity. The accident analysis shows that site boundary radiation doses are within 10 CFR 50.67 limits during a DBA LOCA under these conditions.
SURVEILLANCE SR 3.7.12.1 REQUIREMENTS Systems should be checked periodically to ensure that they function properly. As the environment and normal operating conditions on this system are not severe, testing each train once a month provides an adequate check on this system. Monthly heater operations dry out any moisture that may have accumulated in the carbon from humidity in the ambient air. Systems with heaters must be operated from the control room >_ 10 continuous hours with flow through the HEPA filters and Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.12-4 Revision No. 5
ABFVES B 3.7.12 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued) carbon adsorbers and with the heaters energized. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
SR 3.7.12.2 This SR verifies that the required ABFVES testing is performed in accordance with the Ventilation Filter Testing Program (VFTP). The ABFVES filter tests are in accordance with Reference 5. The VFTP includes testing HEPA filter performance, carbon adsorbers efficiency, system flow rate, and the physical properties of the activated carbon (general use and following specific operations). The system flow rate determination and in-place testing of the filter unit components is performed in the normal operating alignment with both trains in operation.
Flow through each filter unit in this alignment is approximately 30,000 cfm. The normal operating alignment has been chosen to minimize normal radiological protection concerns that occur when the system is operated in an abnormal alignment for an extended period of time.
Operation of the system in other alignments may alter flow rates to the extent that the 30,000 cfm +10% specified in Technical Specification 5.5.11 will not be met. Flow rates outside the specified band under these operating alignments will not require the system to be considered inoperable.
Certain postulated failures and post accident recovery operational alignments may result in post accident system operation with only one train of ABFVES in a "normal" alignment. Under these conditions system flow rate is expected to increase above the normal flow band specified in Technical Specification 5.5.11. An analysis has been performed which conservatively predicts the maximum flow rate under these conditions is approximately 37,000 cfm. 37,000 cfm corresponds to a face velocity of approximately 48 ft/min that is significantly more than the normal 40 ft/min velocity specified in ASTM D3803-1989 (Ref. 10). Therefore, the laboratory test of the carbon penetration is performed in accordance with ASTM D3803-1989 and Generic Letter 99-02 at a face velocity of 48 ft/min. These test results are to be adjusted for a 2.27 inch bed using the methodology presented in ASTM D3803-1989 prior to comparing them to the Technical Specification 5.5.11 limit. Specific test Frequencies and additional information are discussed in detail in the VFTP.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.12-5 Revision No. 5
ABFVES B 3.7.12 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
SR 3.7.12.3 This SR verifies that each ABFVES train starts and operates with flow through the HEPA filters and carbon adsorbers on an actual or simulated actuation signal. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
SR 3.7.12.4 This SR verifies the pressure boundary integrity of the ECCS pump rooms. The following rooms are considered to be ECCS pump rooms (with respect to the ABFVES): centrifugal charging pump rooms, safety injection pump rooms, residual heat removal pump rooms, and the containment spray pump rooms. Although the containment spray system is not normally considered an ECCS system, it is included in this ventilation boundary because of its accident mitigation function which requires the pumping of post accident containment sump fluid. The Elevation 522 pipe chase area is also maintained at a negative pressure by the ABFVES. Since the Elevation 543 and 560 mechanical penetration rooms communicate directly with the Elevation 522 pipe chase area, these penetration rooms are also maintained at a negative pressure by the ABFVES. The ability of the system to maintain the ECCS pump rooms at a negative pressure, with respect to potentially unfiltered adjacent areas, is periodically tested to verify proper functioning of the ABFVES. Upon receipt of a safety injection signal to initiate LOCA operation, the ABFVES is designed to maintain a slight negative pressure in the ECCS pump rooms, with respect to adjacent areas, to prevent unfiltered LEAKAGE. The ABFVES will continue to operate in this mode until the safety injection signal is reset. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.12-6 Revision No. 5
ABFVES B 37.12 BASES REFERENCES
: 1.
UFSAR, Section 6.5.
: 2.
UFSAR, Section 9.4.
: 3.
UFSAR, Section 14.4.
: 4.
UFSAR, Section 15.6.
: 5.
Regulatory Guide 1.52 (Rev. 2).
: 6.
10 CFR 50.67.
: 7.
10 CFR 50.36, Technical Specifications, (c)(2)(ii).
: 8.
Not used.
: 9.
Catawba Nuclear Station License Amendments 90/84 for Units 1/2, August 23, 1991.
: 10.
ASTM D3803-1989.
Revision No. 5 Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.12-7}}

Latest revision as of 21:45, 12 January 2025

Technical Specification Bases Changes
ML11335A148
Person / Time
Site: Catawba  Duke Energy icon.png
Issue date: 11/29/2011
From: Morris J
Duke Energy Corp
To:
Document Control Desk, Office of Nuclear Reactor Regulation
References
Download: ML11335A148 (105)


Text

Duke Energy@

November 29, 2011 U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Document Control Desk Washington, DC 20555-0001 DUKE ENERGY CORPORATION Catawba Nuclear Station 4800 Concord Rd.

York, SC 29745

Subject:

Duke Energy Carolinas, LLC Catawba Nuclear Station, Units 1 and 2 Docket Nos. 50-413 and 50-414 Technical Specification Bases Changes Pursuant to 10CFR 50.4, please find attached changes to the Catawba Nuclear Station Technical Specification Bases. These Bases changes were made according to the provisions of 10CFR 50.59.

Any questions regarding this information should be directed to L. J. Rudy, Regulatory Compliance, at (803)701-3084.

I certify that I am a duly authorized officer of Duke Energy Corporation and that the information contained herein accurately represents changes made to the Technical Specification Bases since the previous submittal.

James R. Morris Attachment

ý.00(

www. duke-energy. corn

U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission November 29, 2011 Page 2 xc:

V. M. McCree, Regional Administrator U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Region II Marquis One Tower 245 Peachtree Center Ave., NE Suite 1200 Atlanta, GA 30303-1257 J. H. Thompson NRC Project Manager (CNS)

U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission One White Flint North, Mail Stop 8-G9A 11555 Rockville Pike Rockville, MD 20852-2738 G. A. Hutto, Senior Resident Inspector Catawba Nuclear Station

Duke DUKE ENERGY CORPORATION D k Catawba Nuclear Station rokEnergy.

4800 Concord Rd.

York, SC 29745 November 22, 2011 Re:

Catawba Nuclear Station Technical Specifications Bases Please replace the corresponding pages in your copy of the Catawba Technical Specifications Manual as follows:

REMOVE THESE PAGES INSERT THESE PAGES LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES Entire Section (19 pages)

Entire Section (19 pages)

TAB 3.3.1 B 3.3.1-1 thru B 3.3.1-55 Revision 6 B 3.3.1-1 thru B 3.3.1-55 Revision 7 TAB 3.7.8 B 3.7.8-1 thru B 3.7.8-7 Revision 3 B 3.7.8-1 thru B 3.7.8-7 Revision 4 TAB 3.7.10 B 3.7.10-1 thru B 3.7.10-9 Revision 9 B 3.7.10-1 thru B 3.7.10-9 Revision 10 TAB 3.7.11 B 3.7.11-1 thru B 3.7.11-4 Revision 2 B 3.7.11-1 thru B 3.7.11-4 Revision 3 www. duke-energy. corn

TAB 3.7.12 B 3.7.12-1 thru B 3.7.12-7 Revision 4 B 3.7.12-1 thru B 3.7.12-7 Revision 5 If you have any questions concerning the contents of this Technical Specification update, contact Kristi Byers at (803)701-3758.

Randy Hart Manager, Regulatory Compliance

Catawba Nuclear Station Technical Specifications List of Effective Pages Page Number iviii iv 1.1-1 1.1-2 1.1-3 1.1-4 1.1-5 1.1-6 1.1.7 1.2-1 1.2-2 1.2-3 1.3-1 1.3-2 1.3-3 1.3-4 1.3-5 1.3-6 1.3-7 1.3-8 1.3-9 1.3-10 1.3-11 1.3-12 1.3-13 1.4-1 1.4-2 Amendment 177/169 219/214 215/209 173/165 173/165 173/165 197/190 258/253 257/252 263/259 179/171 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 Revision Date 4/08/99 3/01/05 6/21/04 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 4/22/02 8/02/10 6/28/10 3/29/11 8/13/99 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 1 11/17/111

1.4-3 1.4-4 2.0-1 3.0-1 3.0-2 3.0-3 3.0-4 3.0-5 3.0-6 3.1.1-1 3.1.2-1 3.1.2-2 3.1.3-1 3.1.3-2 3.1.3-3 3.1.4-1 3.1.4-2 3.1.4-3 3.1.4-4 3.1.5-1 3.1.5-2 3.1.6-1 3.1.6-2 3.1.6-3 3.1.7-1 3.1.7-2 3.1.8-1 3.1.8-2 3.2.1-1 3.2.1-2 3.2.1-3 3.2.1-4 173/165 173/165 210/204 235/231 235/231 235/231 235/231 235/231 235/231 263/259 173/165 263/259 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 263/259 263/259 173/165 263/259 173/165 173/165 263/259 173/165 173/165 173/165 263/259 173/165 173/165 263/259 263/259 9/30/98 9/30/98 12/19/03 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 2 11/17/11

3.2.1-5 3.2.2-1 3.2.2-2 3.2.2-3 3.2.2-4 3.2.3-1 3.2.4-1 3.2.4-2 3.2.4-3 3.2.4-4 3.3.1-1 3.3.1-2 3.3.1-3 3.3.1-4 3.3.1-5 3.3.1-6 3.3.1-7 3.3.1-8 3.3.1-9 3.3.1-10 3.3.1-11 3.3.1-12 3.3.1-13 3.3.1-14 3.3.1-15 3.3.1-16 3.3.1-17 3.3.1-18 3.3.1-19 3.3.1-20 3.3.1-21 3.3.1-22 3.3.2-1 263/259 173/165 173/165 263/259 263/259 263/259 173/165 173/165 173/165 263/259 173/165 247/240 247/240 207/201 247/240 247/240 247/240 173/165 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 173/165 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 12/30/08 12/30/08 7/29/03 12/30/08 12/30/08 12/30/08 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/30/98 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 3 11/17/111

3.3.2-2 3.3.2-3 3.3.2-4 3.3.2-5 3.3.2-6 3.3.2-7 3.3.2-8 3.3.2-9 3.3.2-10 3.3.2-11 3.3.2-12 3.3.2-13 3.3.2-14 3.3.2-15 3.3.2-16 3.3.2-17 3.3.3-1 3.3.3-2 3.3.3-3 3.3.3-4 3.3.4-1 3.3.4-2 3.3.4-3 3.3.5-1 3.3.5-2 3.3.6-1 3.3.6-2 3.3.6-3 3.3.9-1 3.3.9-2 3.3.9-3 3.3.9-4 247/240 247/240 247/240 264/260 264/260 249/243 249/243 249/243 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 264/260 263/259 219/214 219/214 263/259 219/214 213/207 263/259 173/165 173/165 263/259 196/189 263/259 196/189 207/201 207/201 263/259 263/259 12/30/08 12/30/08 12/30/08 6/13/11 6/13/11 4/2/09 4/2/09 4/2/09 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 6/13/11 3/29/11 3/1/05 3/1/05 3/29/11 3/1/05 4/29/04 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/20/02 3/29/11 3/20/02 7/29/03 7/29/03 3/29/11 3/29/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 4 11/17/11

3.4.1-1 3.4.1-2 3.4.1-3 3.4.1-4 3.4.1-5 3.4.1-6 (deleted)

(deleted) 3.4.2-1 3.4.3-1 3.4.3-2 3.4.3-3 3.4.3-4 3.4.3-5 3.4.3-6 3.4.4-1 3.4.5-1 3.4.5-2 3.4.5-3 3.4.6-1 3.4.6-2 3.4.6-3 3.4.7-1 3.4.7-2 3.4.7-3 3.4.8-1 3.4.8-2 3.4.9-1 3.4.9-2 3.4.10-1 3.4.10-2 3.4-11-1 3.4.11-2 3.4.11-3 210/204 210/204 263/259 210/204 184/176 184/176 173/165 173/165 263/259 212/206 212/206 212/206 212/206 263/259 207/201 207/201 263/259 212/206 263/259 263/259 212/206 263/259 263/259 207/201 263/259 173/165 263/259 212/206 173/165 213/207 173/165 263/259 12/19/03 12/19/03 3/29/11 12/19/03 3/01/00 3/01/00 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/4/04 3/4/04 3/4/04 3/4/04 3/29/11 7/29/03 7/29/03 3/29/11 3/4/04 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/4/04 3/29/11 3/29/11 7/29/03 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/4/04 9/30/98 4/29/04 9/30/98 3/29/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 5 11/17/11

3.4.11-4 3.4.12-1 3.4.12-2 3.4.12-3 3.4.12-4 3.4.12-5 3.4.12-6 3.4.12-7 3.4.12-8 3.4.13-1 3.4.13-2 3.4.14-1 3.4.14-2 3.4.14-3 3.4.14-4 3.4.15-1 3.4.15-2 3.4.15-3 3.4.15-4 3.4.16-1 3.4.16-2 3.4.16-3 3.4.16-4 3.4.17-1 3.4.18-1 3.4.18-2 3.5.1-1 3.5.1-2 3.5.1-3 3.5.2-1 3.5.2-2 3.5.2-3 263/259 212/206 213/207 212/206 212/206 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 218/212 263/259 173/165 173/165 263/259 263/259 234/230 234/230 234/230 263/259 213/207 263/259 263/259 173/165 263/259 218/212 218/212 211/205 263/259 263/259 253/248 263/259 263/259 3/29/11 3/4/04 4/29/04 3/4/04 3/4/04 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 1/13/05 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/30/06 9/30/06 9/30/06 3/29/11 4/29/04 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 1/13/05 1/13/05 12/23/03 3/29/11 3/29/11 10/30/09 3/29/11 3/29/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 6 11/17/11

3.5.3-1 3.5.3-2 3.5.4-1 3.5.4-2 3.5.5-1 3.5.5-2 3.6.1-1 3.6.1-2 3.6.2-1 3.6.2-2 3.6.2-3 3.6.2-4 3.6.2-5 3.6.3-1 3.6.3-2 3.6.3-3 3.6.3-4 3.6.3-5 3.6.3-6 3.6.3-7 3.6.4-1 3.6.5-1 3.6.5-2 3.6.6-1 3.6.6-2 3.6.8-1 3.6.8-2 3.6.9-1 3.6.9-2 3.6.10-1 3.6.10-2 3.6.11-1 213/207 173/165 173/165 263/259 173/165 263/259 173/165 192/184 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 263/259 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 263/259 263/259 192/184 263/259 173/165 263/259 263/259 263/259 213/207 263/259 253/248 263/259 173/165 263/259 263/259 4/29/04 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 7/31/01 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 7/31/01 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 4/29/04 3/29/11 10/30/09 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 7 11/17/11

3.6.11-2 3.6.12-1 3.6.12-2 3.6.12-3 3.6.13-1 3.6.13-2 3.6.13-3 3.6.14-1 3.6.14-2 3.6.14-3 3.6.15-1 3.6.15-2 3.6.16-1 3.6.16-2 3.6.17-1 3.7.1-1 3.7.1-2 3.7.1-3 3.7.2-1 3.7.2-2 3.7.3-1 3.7.3-2 3.7.4-1 3.7.4-2 3.7.5-1 3.7.5-2 3.7.5-3 3.7.5-4 3.7.6-1 3.7.6-2 3.7.7-1 3.7.7-2 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 256/251 263/259 263/259 173/165 263/259 263/259 173/165 263/259 263/259 263/259 253/248 173/165 173/165 173/165 173/165 244/238 173/165 244/238 213/207 263/259 253/248 173/165 263/259 263/259 173/165 263/259 253/248 263/259 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 6/28/10 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 10/30/09 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/08/08 9/30/98 9/08/08 4/29/04 3/29/11 10/30/09 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 10/30/09 3/29/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 8 11/17/11

3.7.8-1 3.7.8-2 3.7.8-3 3.7.9-1 3.7.9-2 3.7.10-1 3.7.10-2 3.7.10-3 3.7.11-1 3.7.11-2 3.7.12-1 3.7.12-2 3.7.13-1 3.7.13-2 3.7.14-1 3.7.15-1 3.7.16-1 3.7.16-2 3.7.16-3 3.7.17-1 3.8.1-1 3.8.1-2 3.8.1-3 3.8.1-4 3.8.1-5 3.8.1-6 3.8.1-7 3.8.1-8 3.8.1-9 3.8.1-10 3.8.1-11 3.8.1-12 243/237 243/237 263/259 263/259 263/259 250/245 260/255 263/259 198/191 263/259 253/248 263/259 198/191 263/259 263/259 263/259 233/229 233/229 233/229 263/259 253/248 173/165 253/248 173/165 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 263/259 07/30/08 07/30/08 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 7/30/09 8/9/10 3/29/11 4/23/02 3/29/11 10/30/09 3/29/11 4/23/02 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/27/06 9/27/06 9/27/06 3/29/11 10/30/09 9/30/98 10/30/09 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 9 11/17/11

3.8.1-13 3.8.1-14 3.8.1-15 3.8.2-1 3.8.2-2 3.8.2-3 3.8.3-1 3.8.3-2 3.8.3-3 3.8.4-1 3.8.4-2 3.8.4-3 3.8.4-4 3.8.4-5 3.8.5-1 3.8.5-2 3.8.6-1 3.8.6-2 3.8.6-3 3.8.6-4 3.8.6-5 3.8.7-1 3.8.7-2 3.8.8-1 3.8.8-2 3.8.9-1 3.8.9-2 3.8.9-3 3.8.10-1 3.8.10-2 3.9.1-1 3.9.2-1 263/259 263/259 263/259 173/165 207/201 173/165 175/167 263/259 263/259 173/165 263/259 263/259 263/259 262/258 173/165 207/201 253/248 253/248 253/248 263/259 223/218 173/165 263/259 173/165 263/259 173/165 173/165 263/259 207/201 263/259 263/259 215/209 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 9/30/98 7/29/03 9/30/98 1/15/99 3/29111 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 12/20/10 9/30/98 7/29/03 10/30/09 10/30/09 10/30/09 3/29/11 4/27/05 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 3/29/11 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/29/11 7/29/03 3/29/11 3/29/11 6/21/04 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 10 11/17/11

3.9.2-2 3.9.3-1 3.9.3-2 3.9.4-1 3.9.4-2 3.9.5-1 3.9.5-2 3.9.6-1 3.9.7-1 4.0-1 4.0-2 5.1-1 5.2-1 5.2-2 5.2-3 5.3-1 5.4-1 5.5-1 5.5-2 5.5-3 5.5-4 5.5-5 5.5-6 5.5-7 5.5-7a 5.5-8 5.5-9 5.5-10 5.5-11 5.5-12 5.5-13 5.5-14 263/259 227/222 263/259 207/201 263/259 207/201 263/259 263/259 263/259 220/215 233/229 173/165 253/248 251/246 Deleted 181/173 173/165 205/198 205/198 173/165 173/165 216/210 252/247 218/212

---/257

---/257 218/212 227/222 227/222 218/212 218/212 218/212 3/29/11 9/30/05 3/29/11 7/29/03 3/29/11 7/29/03 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/03/05 9/27/06 9/30/98 10/30/09 9/21/09 9/21/09 11/02/99 9/30/98 3/12/03 3/12/03 9/30/98 9/30/98 8/5/04 10/30/09 1/13/05 9/27/10 9/27/10 1/13/05 9/30/05 9/30/05 1/13/05 1/13/05 1/13/05 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 11 11/17/11

5.5-15 5.5-16 5.6-1 5.6-2 5.6-3 5.6-4 5.6-5 5.6-6 5.7-1 5.7-2 263/259 263/259 222/217 253/248 222/217 222/217

---/257

---/257 173/165 173/165 3/29/11 3/29/11 3/31/05 10/30/09 3/31/05 3/31/05 9/27/10 4/13/09 9/30/98 9/30/98 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 12

..11/17/11

ii iii B 2.1.1-1 B 2.1.1-2 B 2.1.1-3 B 2.1.2-1 B 2.1.2-2 B 2.1.2-3 B 3.0-1 B 3.0-2 B 3.0-3 B 3.0-4 B 3.0-5 B 3.0-6 B 3.0-7 B 3.0-8 B 3.0-9 B 3.0-10 B 3.0-11 B 3.0-12 B 3.0-13 B 3.0-14 B 3.0-15 B 3.0-16 B 3.0-17 B 3.0-18 B 3.0-19 B 3.1.1-1 thru B 3.1.1-6 BASES Revision 1 Revision 2 Revision 1 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 1 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 1 Revision 2 Revision 3 Revision 3 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 3 Revision 2 Revision 3 Revision 3 Revision 3 Revision 3 Revision 3 Revision 1 Revision 1 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 3 4/08/99 3/01/05 6/21/04 9/30/98 12/19/03 12/19/03 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 3/19/07 5/05/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 13 10/24/11

B 3.1.2-1 thru B 3.1.2-5 B 3.1.3-1 thru B 3.1.3-6 B 3.1.4-1 thru B 3.1.4-9 B 3.1.5-1 thru B 3.1.5-4 B 3.1.6-1 thru B 3.1.6-6 B 3.1.7-1 B 3.1.7-2 B 3.1.7-3 B 3.1.7-4 B 3.1.7-5 B 3.1.7-6 B 3.1.8-1 thru B 3.1.8-6 B 3.2.1-1 thru B 3.2.1.-11 B 3.2.2-1 thru B 3.2.2-10 B 3.2.3-1 thru B 3.2.3-4 B 3.2.4-1 thru B 3.2.4-7 B 3.3.1-1 thru B.3.3.1-55 B 3.3.2-1 thru B 3.3.2-49 B 3.3.3-1 thru B.3.3.3-16 B 3.3.4-1 thru B 3.3.4-5 Revision 2 Revision 1 Revision 1 Revision 2 Revision 1 Revision 0 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 4 Revision 3 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 7 Revision 10 Revision 4 Revision 2 5/05/11 4/26/00 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 9/30/98 1/08/04 1/08/04 1/08/04 1/08/04 1/08/04 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 10/24/11 6/13/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page.14 10/24/11

B 3.3.5-1 thru B 3.3.5-6 B 3.3.6-1 thru B 3.3.6-5 B 3.3.9-1 thru B 3.3.9-5 B 3.4.1-1 thru B 3.4.1-5 B 3.4.2-1 thru B 3.4.2-3 B 3.4.3-1 thru B 3.4.3-6 B 3.4.4-1 thru B 3.4.4-3 B 3.4.5-1 thru B 3.4.5-6 B 3.4.6-1 thru B 3.4.6-5 B 3.4.7-1 thru B 3.4.7-5 B 3.4.8-1 thru B 3.4.8-3 B 3.4.9-1 thru B 3.4.9-4 B 3.4.10-1 B 3.4.10-2 B 3.4.10-3 B 3.4.10-4 B 3.4.11-1 thru B 3.4.11-7 B 3.4.12-1 thru B 3.4.12-13 B 3.4.13-1 thru B 3.4.13-7 B 3.4.14-1 thru B 3.4.14-6 B 3.4.15-1 thru B 3.4.15-10 B 3.4.16-1 thru B 3.4.16-6 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Revision 2 Revision 5 Revision 2 Revision 3 Revision 0 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 3 Revision 4 Revision 5 Revision 3 Revision 2 Revision 1 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 2 Revision 4 Revision 4 Revision 6 Revision 3 Revision 6 Revision 3 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 9/30/98 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 3/4/04 9/30/98 3/4/04 10/30/09 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 Page 15 10/24/11

B 3.4.17-1 thru B 3.4.17-3 B 3.4.18-1 B 3.4.18-2 B 3.4.18-3 B 3.4.18-4 B 3.4.18-5 B 3.4.18-6 B 3.4.18-7 B 3.4.18-8 B 3.5.1-1 thru B 3.5.1-8 B 3.5.2-1 thru B 3.5.2-10 B 3.5.3-1 B 3.5.3-2 B 3.5.3-3 B 3.5.4-1 thru B.3.5.4-6 B 3.5.5-1 thru B 3.5.5-4 B 3.6.1-1 thru B 3.6.1-5 B 3.6.2-1 thru B 3.6.2-8 B 3.6.3-1 thru B 3.6.3-14 B 3.6.4-1 thru B 3.6.4-4 B 3.6.5-1 thru B 3.6.5-4 B 3.6.6-1 thru B 3.6.6-7 B 3.6.8-1 thru B 3.6.8-5 B 3.6.9-1 thru B 3.6.9-5 Revision 2 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 3 Revision 3 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 1 Revision 4 Revision 1 Revision 1 Revision 2 Revision 4 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 6 Revision 3 Revision 6 5/05/11 1/13/05 1/13/05 3/18/08 1/13/05 1/13/05 1/13/05 1/13/05 3/18/08 5/05/11 5/05/11 9/30/98 4/29/04 4/29/04 5/05/11 5/05/11 7/31/01 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05111 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 16 10/24/1 1

B 3.6.10-1 thru B 3.6.10-6 B 3.6.11-1 thru B 3.6.11-6 B 3.6.12-1 thru B 3.6.12-11 B 3.6.13-1 thru B 3.6.13-9 B 3.6.14-1 thru B 3.6.14-5 B 3.6.15-1 thru B 3.6.15-4 B 3.6.16-1 thru B 3.6.16-4 B 3.6.17-1 B 3.6.17-2 B 3.6.17-3 B 3.6.17-4 B 3.6.17-5 B 3.7.1-1 B 3.7.1-2 B 3.7.1-3 B 3.7.1-4 B 3.7.1-5 B 3.7.2-1 B 3.7.2-2 B 3.7.2-3 B 3.7.2-4 B 3.7.2-5 B 3.7.3-1 B 3.7.3-2 B 3.7.3-3 B 3.7.3-4 B 3.7.3-5 B 3.7.3-6 Revision 2 Revision 5 Revision 5 Revision 4 Revision 1 Revision 1 Revision 3 Revision 1 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 1 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 2 Revision 1 Revision 3 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 2 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 3/13/08 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 3/13/08 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 10/30/09 10/30/09 9/30/98 9/30/98 6/23/10 9/08/08 10/30/09 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/30/98 9/08/08 10/30/09 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 17 10/24/11

B 3.7.4-1 thru B 3.7.4-4 B 3.7.5-1 thru B 3.7.5-9 B 3.7.6-1 thru B 3.7.6-3 B 3.7.7-1 thru B 3.7.7-5 B 3.7.8-1 thru B 3.7.8-7 B 3.7.9-1 thru B 3.7.9-4 B 3.7.10-1 thru B 3.7.10-9 B 3.7.11-1 thru B 3.7.11-4 B 3.7.12-1 thru B 3.7.12-7 B 3.7.13-1 thru B 3.7.13-5 B 3.7.14-1 thru B 3.7.14-3 B 3.7.15-1 thru B 3.7.15-4 B 3.7.16-1 B 3.7.16-2 B 3.7.16-3 B 3.7.16-4 B 3.7.17-1 thru B 3.7.17-3 B 3.8.1-1 thru B.3.8.1-29 B 3.8.2-1 B 3.8.2-2 B 3.8.2-3 B 3.8.2-4 B 3.8.2-5 B 3.8.2-6 Revision 2 Revision 3 Revision 3 Revision 2 Revision 4 Revision 3 Revision 10 Revision 3 Revision 5 Revision 4 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 2 Revision 0 Revision 2 Revision 4 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 0 Revision 1 Revision 2 Revision 1 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 10/24/11 5/05/11 10/24/11 10/24/11 10/24/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 9/27/06 9/27/06 9/27/06 9/27/06 5/05/11 5/05/11 9/30/98 9130/98 9/30/98 5/10/05 5/10/05 5/10/05 I

Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 18 10/24/11

B 3.8.3-1 thru B 3.8.3-8 B 3.8.4-1 thru B3.8.4. 10 B 3.8.5-1 B 3.8.5-2 B 3.8.5-3 B 3.8.6-1 thru B 3.8.6-7 B 3.8.7-1 thru B 3.8.7-4 B 3.8.8-1 thru B 3.8.8-4 B 3.8.9-1 thru B 3.8.9-10 B 3.8.10-1 thru B 3.8.10-4 B 3.9.1-1 thru B 3.9.1-4 B 3.9.2-1 thru B 3.9.2.4 B 3.9.3-1 thru B 3.9.3-5 B 3.9.4-1 thru B 3.9.4-4 B 3.9.5-1 thru B 3.9.5-4 B 3.9.6-1 thru B 3.9.6-3 B 3.9.7-1 thru B 3.9.7-3 Revision 4 Revision 10 Revision 0 Revision 2 Revision 1 Revision 4 Revision 3 Revision 3 Revision 2 Revision 3 Revision 3 Revision 4 Revision 4 Revision 4 Revision 3 Revision 2 Revision 1 5/05/11 5/05/11 9/30/98 7/29/03 7/29/03 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 5/05/11 Catawba Units 1 and 2 Page 19 10/24/11

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 B 3.3 INSTRUMENTATION B 3.3.1 Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation BASES BACKGROUND The RTS initiates a unit shutdown, based on the values of selected unit parameters, to protect against violating the core fuel design limits and Reactor Coolant System (RCS) pressure boundary during anticipated operational occurrences (AOOs) and to assist the Engineered Safety Features (ESF) Systems in mitigating accidents.

The protection and monitoring systems have been designed to assure safe operation of the reactor. This is achieved by specifying limiting safety system settings (LSSS) in terms of parameters directly monitored by the RTS, as well as specifying LCOs on other reactor system parameters and equipment performance.

The LSSS, defined in this specification as the Allowable Value, in conjunction with the LCOs, establish the threshold for protective system action to prevent exceeding acceptable limits during Design Basis Accidents (DBAs).

During AOOs, which are those events expected to occur one or more times during the unit life, the acceptable limits are:

1.

The Departure from Nucleate Boiling Ratio (DNBR) shall be maintained above the Safety Limit (SL) value to prevent departure from nucleate boiling (DNB);

2.

Fuel centerline melt shall not occur; and

3.

The RCS pressure SL of 2735 psig shall not be exceeded.

Operation within the SLs of Specification 2.0, "Safety Limits (SLs)," also maintains the above values and assures that offsite dose will be within the 10 CFR 20 and 10 CFR 50.67 criteria during AOOs.

Accidents are events that are analyzed even though they are not expected to occur during the unit life. The acceptable limit during accidents is that offsite dose shall be maintained within an acceptable fraction of 10 CFR 50.67 limits. Different accident categories are allowed a different fraction of these limits, based on probability of occurrence.

Meeting the acceptable dose limit for an accident category is considered having acceptable consequences for that event.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1 -1 Revision No-7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES BACKGROUND (continued)

The RTS instrumentation is segmented into four distinct but interconnected categories as illustrated in UFSAR, Chapter 7 (Ref. 1),

and as identified below:

1.

Field transmitters or process sensors: provide a measurable electronic signal based upon the physical characteristics of the parameter being measured;

2.

Process monitoring systems, including the Process Control System, the Nuclear Instrumentation System (NIS), and various field contacts and sensors: monitors various plant parameters, provides any required signal processing, and provides digital outputs when parameters exceed predetermined limits. They may also provide outputs for control, indication, alarm, computer input, and recording;

3.

Solid State Protection System (SSPS), including input, logic, and output bays: combines the input signals from the process monitoring systems per predetermined logic and initiates a reactor trip and ESF actuation when warranted by the process monitoring systems inputs; and

4.

Reactor trip switchgear, including reactor trip breakers (RTBs) and bypass breakers: provides the means to interrupt power to the control rod drive mechanisms (CRDMs) and allows the rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs), or "rods," to fall into the core and shut down the reactor. The bypass breakers allow testing of the RTBs at power.

Field Transmitters or Sensors To meet the design demands for redundancy and reliability, more than one, and often as many as four, field transmitters or sensors are used to measure unit parameters. To account for the calibration tolerances and instrument drift, which are assumed to occur between calibrations, statistical allowances are provided in the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT.

The OPERABILITY of each transmitter or sensor can be evaluated when its "as found" calibration data are compared against its documented acceptance criteria.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-2 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES BACKGROUND (continued)

Process Monitoring Systems Generally, three or four channels of process control equipment are used for the signal processing of unit parameters measured by the field instruments. The process control equipment provides signal conditioning, compatible output signals for instruments located on the main control board, and comparison of measured input signals with setpoints established by safety analyses. These setpoints are defined in UFSAR, Chapter 7 (Ref. 1), Chapter 6 (Ref. 2), and Chapter 15 (Ref. 3). If the measured value of a unit parameter exceeds the predetermined setpoint, an output from a bistable is forwarded to the SSPS for decision logic processing. Channel separation is maintained up to and through the input bays. However, not all unit parameters require four channels of sensor measurement and signal processing. Some unit parameters provide input only to the SSPS, while others provide input to the SSPS, the main control board, the unit computer, and one or more control systems.

Generally, if a parameter is used only for input to the protection circuits, three channels with a two-out-of-three logic are sufficient to provide the required reliability and redundancy. If one channel fails in a direction that would not result in a partial Function trip, the Function is still OPERABLE with a two-out-of-two logic. If one channel fails, such that a partial Function trip occurs, a trip will not occur and the Function is still OPERABLE with a one-out-of-two logic.

Generally, if a parameter is used for input to the SSPS and a control function, four channels with a two-out-of-four logic are sufficient to, provide the required reliability and redundancy. The circuit must be able to withstand both an input failure to the control system, which may then require the protection function actuation, and a single failure in the other channels providing the protection function actuation. Again, a single failure will neither cause nor prevent the protection function actuation.

These requirements are described in IEEE-279-1971 (Ref. 4). The actual number of channels required for each unit parameter is specified in Reference 1.

Two logic channels are required to ensure no single random failure of a logic channel will disable the RTS. The logic channels are designed such that testing required while the reactor is at power may be accomplished without causing a trip. Provisions to allow removing logic channels from service during maintenance are unnecessary because of the logic system's designed reliability.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.31-3 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES BACKGROUND (continued)

Trip Setpoints and Allowable Values The NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINTS are the nominal values at which the bistables are set. Any bistable is considered to be properly adjusted when the "as left" value is within the band for CHANNEL CALIBRATION tolerance.

The NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINTS used in the bistables are based on the analytical limits (Ref. 1, 2, and 3). The selection of these NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINTS is such that adequate protection is provided when all sensor and processing time delays, calibration tolerances, instrumentation uncertainties, instrument drift, and severe environment errors for those RTS channels that must function in harsh environments as defined by 10 CFR 50.49 (Ref. 5) are taken into account. The actual as-left setpoint of the bistable assures that the actual trip occurs in time to prevent an analytical limit from being exceeded.

The Allowable Value accounts for changes in random measurement errors between COTs. One example of such a change in measurement error is drift during the surveillance interval. If the COT demonstrates that the loop trips within the Allowable Value, the loop is OPERABLE. A trip within the Allowable Value ensures that the predictions of equipment performance used to develop the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT are still valid, and that the equipment will initiate a trip in response to an AOO in time to prevent an analytical limit from being exceeded (and that the consequences of DBAs will be acceptable, providing the unit is operated from within the LCOs at the onset of the AOO or DBA and the equipment functions as designed). Note that in the accompanying LCO 3.3.1, the Allowable Values of Table 3.3.1-1 are the LSSS.

Each channel of the process control equipment can be tested on line to verify that the signal or setpoint accuracy is within the specified allowance requirements. Once a designated channel is taken out of service for testing, a simulated signal is injected in place of the field instrument signal. The process equipment for the channel in test is then tested, verified, and calibrated. SRs for the channels are specified in the SRs section.

The determination of the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINTS and Allowable Values listed in Table 3.3.1-1 incorporates all of the known uncertainties applicable for each channel. The magnitudes of these uncertainties are factored into the determination of each NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT. All field sensors and signal processing equipment Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-4 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES BACKGROUND (continued) for these channels are assumed to operate within the allowances of these uncertainty magnitudes.

Solid State Protection System

-T-heSSPS equipment is used for the decision logic processing of outputs from the signal processing equipment bistables. To meet the redundancy requirements, two trains of SSPS, each performing the same functions, are provided. If one train is taken out of service for maintenance or test purposes, the second train will provide reactor trip and/or ESF actuation for the unit. If both trains are taken out of service or placed in test, a reactor trip will result. Each train is packaged in its own cabinet for physical and electrical separation to satisfy separation and independence requirements. The system has been designed to trip the reactor in the event of a loss of power, directing the unit to a safe shutdown condition.

The SSPS performs the decision logic for actuating a reactor trip or ESF actuation, generates the electrical output signal that will initiate the required trip or actuation, and provides the status, permissive, and annunciator output signals to the main control room of the unit.

The outputs from the process monitoring systems are sensed by the SSPS equipment and combined into logic matrices that represent combinations indicative of various unit upset and accident transients. If a logic matrix combination is completed, the system will initiate a reactor trip or send actuation signals via master and slave relays to those components whose aggregate Function best serves to alleviate the condition and restore the unit to a stable condition. Examples are given in the Applicable Safety Analyses, LCO, and Applicability sections of this Bases.

Reactor Trip Switchqear The RTBs are in the electrical power supply line from the control rod drive motor generator set power supply to the CRDMs. Opening of the RTBs interrupts power to the CRDMs, which allows the shutdown rods and control rods to fall into the core by gravity. Each RTB is equipped with a bypass breaker to allow testing of the RTB while the unit is at power.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-5 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES BACKGROUND (continued)

During normal operation the output from the SSPS is a voltage signal that energizes the undervoltage coils in the RTBs and bypass breakers, if in use. When the required logic matrix combination is completed, the SSPS output voltage signal is removed, the undervoltage coils are de-energized, the breaker trip lever is actuated by a compressed spring that is released by de-energizing the undervoltage coil, and the RTBs and bypass breakers are tripped open. This allows the shutdown rods and control rods to fall into the core. In addition to the de-energization of the undervoltage coils, each breaker is also equipped with a shunt trip device that is energized to trip the breaker open upon receipt of a reactor trip signal from the SSPS. Either the undervoltage coil or the shunt trip mechanism is sufficient by itself, thus providing a diverse trip mechanism.

The decision logic matrix Functions are described in the functional diagrams included in Reference 1. In addition to the reactor trip or ESF, these diagrams also describe the various "permissive interlocks" that are associated with unit conditions. Each train has a built in testing device that can test the decision logic matrix Functions and the actuation devices while the unit is at power. When any one train is taken out of service for testing, the other train is capable of providing unit monitoring and protection until the testing has been completed. The testing device is semiautomatic to minimize testing time.

APPLICABLE The RTS functions to maintain the SLs during all AOOs and mitigates SAFETY ANALYSES, the consequences of DBAs in all MODES in which the RTBs are closed.

LCO, and APPLICABILITY Each of the analyzed accidents and transients can be detected by one or more RTS Functions. The accident analysis described in Reference 3 takes credit for most RTS trip Functions. RTS trip Functions not specifically credited in the accident analysis are qualitatively credited in the safety analysis and the NRC staff approved licensing basis for the unit. These RTS trip Functions may provide protection for conditions that do not require dynamic transient analysis to demonstrate Function performance. They may also serve as backups to RTS trip Functions that were credited in the accident analysis.

The LCO requires all instrumentation performing an RTS Function, listed in Table 3.3.1-1 in the accompanying LCO, to be OPERABLE. Failure of any instrument renders the affected channel(s) inoperable and reduces the reliability of the affected Functions.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 8 3.3.1-6 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, AND APPLICABILITY (continued)

The LCO generally requires OPERABILITY of three or four channels in each instrumentation Function, two channels of Manual Reactor Trip in each logic Function, and two trains in each Automatic Trip Logic Function. Four OPERABLE instrumentation channels in a two-out-of-four configuration are required when one RTS channel is also used as a control system input. This configuration accounts for the possibility of the shared channel failing in such a manner that it creates a transient that requires RTS action.- In this case, the RTS will still provide protection, even with random failure of one of the other three protection channels.

Three operable instrumentation channels in a two-out-of-three configuration are generally required when there is no potential for control system and protection system interaction that could simultaneously create a need for RTS trip and disable one RTS channel. The two-out-of-three and two-out-of-four configurations allow one channel to be tripped during maintenance or testing without causing a reactor trip. Specific exceptions to the above general philosophy exist and are discussed below.

Reactor Trip System Functions The safety analyses and OPERABILITY requirements applicable to each RTS Function are discussed below:

1.

Manual Reactor Trip The Manual Reactor Trip ensures that the control room operator can initiate a reactor trip at any time by using either of two reactor trip switches in the control room. A Manual Reactor Trip accomplishes the same results as any one of the automatic trip Functions. It may be used by the reactor operator to shut down the reactor whenever any parameter is rapidly trending toward its Trip Setpoint.

The LCO requires two Manual Reactor Trip channels to be OPERABLE. Each channel is controlled by a manual reactor trip switch. Each channel actuates one or more reactor trip breakers in both trains. Two independent channels are required to be OPERABLE so that no single random failure will disable the Manual Reactor Trip Function.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-7 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)

In MODE 1 or 2, manual initiation of a reactor trip must be OPERABLE. These are the MODES in which the shutdown rods and/or control rods are partially or fully withdrawn from the core. In MODE 3, 4, or 5, the manual initiation Function must also be OPERABLE if the shutdown rods or control rods are withdrawn or the Control Rod Drive (CRD) System is capable of withdrawing the shutdown rods or the control rods. In this condition, inadvertent control rod withdrawal is possible. In MODE 3, 4, or 5, manual initiation of a reactor trip does not have to be OPERABLE if the CRD System is not capable of withdrawing the shutdown rods or control rods. If the rods cannot be withdrawn from the core, there is no need to be able to trip the reactor because all of the rods are inserted. In MODE 6, the CRDMs are disconnected from the control rods and shutdown rods. Therefore, the manual initiation Function is not required.

2.

Power Range Neutron Flux The NIS power range detectors are located external to the reactor vessel and measure neutrons leaking from the core. The NIS power range detectors provide input to the Rod Control System and the Steam Generator (SG) Water Level Control System.

Therefore, the actuation logic must be able to withstand an input failure to the control system, which may then require the protection function actuation, and a single failure in the other channels providing the protection function actuation. Note that this Function also provides a signal to prevent automatic and manual rod withdrawal prior to initiating a reactor trip. Limiting further rod withdrawal may terminate the transient and eliminate the need to trip the reactor.

a.

Power Range Neutron Flux-High The Power Range Neutron Flux-High trip Function ensures that protection is provided, from all power levels, against a positive reactivity excursion leading to DNB during power operations. These can be caused by rod withdrawal or reductions in RCS temperature.

The LCO requires all four of the Power Range Neutron Flux-High channels to be OPERABLE.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-8 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, AND APPLICABILITY (continued)

In MODE 1 or 2, when a positive reactivity excursion could occur, the Power Range Neutron Flux-High trip must be OPERABLE. This Function will terminate the reactivity excursion and shut down the reactor prior to reaching a power level that could damage the fuel. In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, the NIS power range detectors cannot detect neutron levels in this range. In these MODES, the Power Range Neutron Flux-High does not have to be OPERABLE because the reactor is shut down and reactivity excursions into the power range are extremely unlikely. Other RTS Functions and administrative controls provide protection against reactivity additions when in MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6.

b.

Power Range Neutron Flux-Low The LCO requirement for the Power Range Neutron Flux-Low trip Function ensures that protection is provided against a positive reactivity excursion from low power or subcritical conditions.

The LCO requires all four of the Power Range Neutron Flux-Low channels to be OPERABLE.

In MODE 1, below the Power Range Neutron Flux (P-1 0 setpoint), and in MODE 2, the Power Range Neutron Flux-Low trip must be OPERABLE. This Function may be manually blocked by the operator when two out of four power range channels are greater than approximately 10% RTP (P-10 setpoint). This Function is automatically unblocked when three out of four power range channels are below the P-10 setpoint. Above the P-10 setpoint, positive reactivity additions are mitigated by the Power Range Neutron Flux-High trip Function.

In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, the Power Range Neutron Flux-Low trip Function does not have to be OPERABLE because the reactor is shut down and the NIS power range detectors cannot detect neutron levels in this range. Other RTS trip Functions and administrative controls provide protection Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-9 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, AND APPLICABILITY (continued) against positive reactivity additions or power excursions in MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6.

3.

Power Range Neutron Flux - High Positive Rate The Power Range Neutron Flux-High Positive Rate trip uses the same channels as discussed for Function 2 above.

The Power Range Neutron Flux-High Positive Rate trip Function ensures that protection is provided against rapid increases in neutron flux that are characteristic of an RCCA drive rod housing rupture and the accompanying ejection of the RCCA. This Function compliments the Power Range Neutron Flux-High and Low Setpoint trip Functions to ensure that the criteria are met for a rod ejection from the power range.

The LCO requires all four of the Power Range Neutron Flux-High Positive Rate channels to be OPERABLE.

In MODE 1 or 2, when there is a potential to add a large amount of positive reactivity from a rod ejection accident (REA), the Power Range Neutron Flux-High Positive Rate trip must be OPERABLE.

In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, the Power Range Neutron Flux-High Positive Rate trip Function does not have to be OPERABLE because other RTS trip Functions and administrative controls will provide protection against positive reactivity additions. In MODE 6, no rods are withdrawn and the SDM is increased during refueling operations. The reactor vessel head is also removed or the closure bolts are detensioned preventing any pressure buildup. In addition, the NIS power range detectors cannot detect neutron levels present in this mode.

4.

Intermediate Range Neutron Flux The Intermediate Range Neutron Flux trip Function ensures that protection is provided against an uncontrolled RCCA bank rod withdrawal accident from a subcritical condition during startup.

This trip Function provides redundant protection to the Power Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-10 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)

Range Neutron Flux-Low Setpoint trip Function. The NIS intermediate range detectors are located external to the reactor vessel and measure neutrons leaking from the core. Note that this Function also provides a signal to prevent automatic and manual rod withdrawal prior to initiating a reactor trip. Limiting further rod withdrawal may terminate the transient and eliminate the need to trip the reactor.

The LCO requires two channels of Intermediate Range Neutron Flux to be OPERABLE. Two OPERABLE channels are sufficient to ensure no single random failure will disable this trip Function.

Because this trip Function is important only during startup, there is generally no need to disable channels for testing while the Function is required to be OPERABLE. Therefore, a third channel is unnecessary.

In MODE 1 below the P-10 setpoint, and in MODE 2, when there is a potential for an uncontrolled RCCA bank rod withdrawal accident during reactor startup, the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux trip must be OPERABLE. Above the P-10 setpoint, the Power Range Neutron Flux-High Setpoint trip and the Power Range Neutron Flux-High Positive Rate trip provide core protection for a rod withdrawal accident. In MODE 3, 4, or 5, the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux trip does not have to be OPERABLE because other RTS trip functions provide protection against positive reactivity additions. The reactor cannot be started up in this condition. The core also has the required SDM to mitigate the consequences of a positive reactivity addition accident. In MODE 6, all rods are fully inserted and the core has a required increased SDM. Also, the NIS intermediate range detectors (Westinghouse-supplied only) cannot detect neutron levels present in this MODE.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-11 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)

5.

Source Range Neutron Flux The LCO requirement for the Source Range Neutron Flux trip Function ensures that protection is provided against an uncontrolled RCCA bank rod withdrawal accident from a subcritical condition during startup.

This trip Function provides redundant protection to the Power Range Neutron Flux-Low Setpoint and Intermediate Range Neutron Flux trip Functions. In MODES 3, 4, and 5, administrative controls also prevent the uncontrolled withdrawal of rods. The NIS source range detectors are located external to the reactor vessel and measure neutrons leaking from the core. The NIS source range detectors do not provide any inputs to control systems. The source range trip is the only RTS automatic protection function required in MODES 3, 4, and 5. Therefore, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available.

The LCO requires two channels of Source Range Neutron Flux to be OPERABLE. Two OPERABLE channels are sufficient to ensure no single random failure will disable this trip Function.

The Source Range Neutron Flux Function provides protection for control rod withdrawal from subcritical and control rod ejection events. The Function also provides visual neutron flux indication in the control room.

In MODE 2 when below the P-6 setpoint during a reactor startup, the Source Range Neutron Flux trip must be OPERABLE. Above the P-6 setpoint, the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux trip and the Power Range Neutron Flux-Low Setpoint trip will provide core protection for reactivity accidents. Above the P-6 setpoint, the NIS source range detectors are de-energized and inoperable (Westinghouse-supplied only). Above the P-6 setpoint, the Source Range Neutron Flux trip is blocked (Thermo Scientific-supplied only).

In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the reactor shut down, the Source Range Neutron Flux trip Function must also be OPERABLE. If the CRD System is capable of rod withdrawal, the Source Range Neutron Flux trip must be OPERABLE to provide core protection against a rod withdrawal accident. If the CRD System is not capable of rod withdrawal, the source range detectors are not required to trip the reactor.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-12 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)

6.

Overtemperature AT The Overtemperature AT trip Function is provided to ensure that the design limit DNBR is met. This trip Function also limits the range over which the Overpower AT trip Function must provide protection. The inputs to the Overtemperature AT trip include pressurizer pressure, coolant temperature, axial power distribution, and reactor power as indicated by loop AT assuming full reactor coolant flow. Protection from violating the DNBR limit is assured for those transients that are slow with respect to delays from the core to the measurement system. The function monitors both variation in power and flow since a decrease in flow has the same effect on AT as a power increase. The Overtemperature AT trip Function uses each loop's AT as a measure of reactor power and is compared with a setpoint that is automatically varied with the following parameters:

reactor coolant average temperature-the Trip Setpoint is varied to correct for changes in coolant density and specific heat capacity with changes in coolant temperature; pressurizer pressure-the Trip Setpoint is varied to correct for changes in system pressure; and axial power distribution-f(AI), the Trip Setpoint is varied to account for imbalances in the axial power distribution as detected by the NIS upper and lower power range detectors.

If axial peaks are greater than the design limit, as indicated by the difference between the upper and lower NIS power range detectors, the Trip Setpoint is reduced in accordance with Note 1 of Table 3.3.1-1.

Dynamic compensation is included for system piping delays from the core to the temperature measurement system.

The Overtemperature AT trip Function is calculated for each loop as described in Note 1 of Table 3.3.1-1. Trip occurs if Overtemperature AT is indicated in two loops. The pressure and temperature signals are used for other control functions, therefore, the actuation logic must be able to withstand an input failure to the control system, which may then require the protection function Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-13 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued) actuation, and a single failure in the other channels providing the protection function actuation. Note that this Function also provides a signal to generate a turbine runback prior to reaching the Trip Setpoint. A turbine runback will reduce turbine power and reactor power. A reduction in power will normally alleviate the Overtemperature AT condition and may prevent a reactor trip.

The LCO requires all four channels of the Overtemperature AT trip Function to be OPERABLE. Note that the Overtemperature AT Function receives input from channels shared with other RTS Functions. Failures that affect multiple Functions require entry into the Conditions applicable to all affected Functions.

In MODE 1 or 2, the Overtemperature AT trip must be OPERABLE to prevent DNB. In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, this trip Function does not have to be OPERABLE because the reactor is not operating and there is insufficient heat production to be concerned about DNB.

7.

Overpower AT The Overpower AT trip Function ensures that protection is provided to ensure the integrity of the fuel (i.e., no fuel pellet melting and less than 1% cladding strain) under all possible overpower conditions. This trip Function also limits the required range of the Overtemperature AT trip Function and provides a backup to the Power Range Neutron Flux-High Setpoint trip.

The Overpower AT trip Function ensures that the allowable heat generation rate (kW/ft) of the fuel is not exceeded. It uses the AT of each loop as a measure of reactor power with a setpoint that is automatically varied with the following parameters:

0 reactor coolant average temperature-the Trip Setpoint is varied to correct for changes in coolant density and specific heat capacity with changes in coolant temperature; and rate of change of reactor coolant average temperature-including dynamic compensation for the delays between the core and the temperature measurement system.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-14 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)

The Overpower AT trip Function is calculated for each loop as per Note 2 of Table 3.3.1-1. Trip occurs if Overpower AT is indicated in two loops. The temperature signals are used for other control functions, therefore, the actuation logic must be able to withstand an input failure to the control system, which may then require the protection function actuation, and a single failure in the remaining channels providing the protection function actuation. Note that this Function also provides a signal to generate a turbine runback prior to reaching the Trip Setpoint. A turbine runback will reduce turbine power and reactor power. A reduction in power will normally alleviate the Overpower AT condition and may prevent a reactor trip.

The LCO requires four channels of the Overpower AT trip Function to be OPERABLE. Note that the Overpower AT trip Function receives input from channels shared with other RTS Functions.

Failures that affect multiple Functions require entry into the Conditions applicable to all affected Functions.

In MODE 1 or 2, the Overpower AT trip Function must be OPERABLE. These are the only times that enough heat is generated in the fuel to be concerned about the heat generation rates and overheating of the fuel. In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, this trip Function does not have to be OPERABLE because the reactor is not operating and there is insufficient heat production to be concerned about fuel overheating and fuel damage.

8.

Pressurizer Pressure The same sensors provide input to the Pressurizer Pressure-High and-Low trips and the Overtemperature AT trip. The Pressurizer Pressure channels are also used to provide input to the Pressurizer Pressure Control System, therefore, the actuation logic must be able to withstand an input failure to the control system, which may then require the protection function actuation, and a single failure in the other channels providing the protection function actuation.

a.

Pressurizer Pressure-Low The Pressurizer Pressure-Low trip Function ensures that protection is provided against violating the DNBR limit due to low pressure.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-15 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1.

BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)

The LCO requires four channels of Pressurizer Pressure-Low to be OPERABLE.

In MODE 1, when DNB is a major concern, the Pressurizer Pressure-Low trip must be OPERABLE. This trip Function is automatically enabled on increasing power by the P-7 interlock (NIS power range P-10 or turbine impulse pressure greater than approximately 10% of full power equivalent P-13). On decreasing power, this trip Function is automatically blocked below P-7. Below the P-7 setpoint, power distributions that would cause DNB concerns are unlikely.

b.

Pressurizer Pressure-High The Pressurizer Pressure-High trip Function ensures that protection is provided against overpressurizing the RCS.

This trip Function operates in conjunction with the pressurizer relief and safety valves to prevent RCS overpressure conditions.

The LCO requires four channels of the Pressurizer Pressure-High to be OPERABLE.

The Pressurizer Pressure-High LSSS is selected to be below the pressurizer safety valve actuation pressure and above the power operated relief valve (PORV) setting. This setting minimizes challenges to safety valves while avoiding unnecessary reactor trips for those pressure increases that can be controlled by the PORVs.

In MODE 1 or 2, the Pressurizer Pressure-High trip must be OPERABLE to help prevent RCS overpressurization and minimize challenges to the safety valves. In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, the Pressurizer Pressure-High trip Function does not have to be OPERABLE because transients that could cause an overpressure condition will either be slow to occur or will be mitigated by other trip functions required OPERABLE in these MODES. Therefore, the operator will have sufficient time when required to evaluate unit conditions and take corrective actions. Additionally, low temperature Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-16 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued) overpressure protection systems provide overpressure protection when below MODE 4.

9.

Pressurizer Water Level-High The Pressurizer Water Level-High trip Function provides a backup signal for the Pressurizer Pressure-High trip and also provides protection against water relief through the pressurizer safety valves. These valves are designed to pass steam in order to achieve their design energy removal rate. A reactor trip is actuated prior to the pressurizer becoming water solid. The setpoints are based on percent of instrument span. The LCO requires three channels of Pressurizer Water Level-High to be OPERABLE. The pressurizer level channels are used as input to the Pressurizer Level Control System. A fourth channel is not required to address control/protection interaction concerns. The level channels do not actuate the safety valves, and the high pressure reactor trip is set below the safety valve setting. Therefore, with the slow rate of charging available, pressure overshoot due to level channel failure cannot cause the valve to lift before reactor high pressure trip.

In MODE 1, when there is a potential for overfilling the pressurizer, the Pressurizer Water Level-High trip must be OPERABLE. This trip Function is automatically enabled on increasing power by the P-7 interlock. On decreasing power, this trip Function is automatically blocked below P-7. Below the P-7 setpoint, transients that could raise the pressurizer water level will be slow and the operator will have sufficient time to evaluate unit conditions and take corrective actions.

10.

Reactor Coolant Flow-Low

a.

Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Single Loop)

The Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Single Loop) trip Function ensures that protection is provided against violating the DNBR limit due to low flow in one or more RCS loops, while avoiding reactor trips due to normal variations in loop flow.

Above the P-8 setpoint, which is approximately 48% RTP, a loss of flow in any RCS loop will actuate a reactor trip. The Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-17 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued) setpoints are based on the minimum flow specified in the COLR. Each RCS loop has three flow detectors to monitor flow. The flow signals are not used for any control system input.

The LCO requires three Reactor Coolant Flow-Low channels per loop to be OPERABLE in MODE 1 above P-8.

In MODE 1 above the P-8 setpoint, a loss of flow in one RCS loop could result in DNB conditions in the core. In MODE 1 below the P-8 setpoint, a loss of flow in two or more loops is required to actuate a reactor trip (Function 10.b) because of the lower power level and the greater margin to the design limit DNBR.

b.

Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Two Loops)

The Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Two Loops) trip Function ensures that protection is provided against violating the DNBR limit due to low flow in two or more RCS loops while avoiding reactor trips due to normal variations in loop flow.

Above the P-7 setpoint and below the P-8 setpoint, a loss of flow in two or more loops will initiate a reactor trip. The setpoints are based on the minimum flow specified in the COLR. Each loop has three flow detectors to monitor flow.

The flow signals are not used for any control system input.

The LCO requires three Reactor Coolant Flow-Low channels per loop to be OPERABLE.

In MODE 1 above the P-7 setpoint and below the P-8 setpoint, the Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Two Loops) trip must be OPERABLE. Below the P-7 setpoint, all reactor trips on low flow are automatically blocked since power distributions that would cause a DNB concern at this low power level are unlikely. Above the P-7 setpoint, the reactor trip on low flow in two or more RCS loops is automatically enabled. Above the P-8 setpoint, a loss of flow in any one loop will actuate a reactor trip because of the higher power level and the reduced margin to the design limit DNBR.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-18 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)

11.

Undervoltage Reactor Coolant Pumps The Undervoltage RCPs reactor trip Function ensures that protection is provided against violating the DNBR limit due to a loss of flow in two or more RCS loops. The voltage to each RCP is monitored. Above the P-7 setpoint, a loss of voltage detected on two or more RCP buses will initiate a reactor trip. This trip Function will generate a reactor trip before the Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Two Loops) Trip Setpoint is reached. Time delays are incorporated into the Undervoltage RCPs channels to prevent reactor trips due to momentary electrical power transients.

The LCO requires a total of four Undervoltage RCPs channels (one per bus) to be OPERABLE.

In MODE 1 above the P-7 setpoint, the Undervoltage RCP trip must be OPERABLE. Below the P-7 setpoint, all reactor trips on loss of flow are automatically blocked since power distributions that would cause a DNB concern at this low power level are unlikely.

Above the P-7 setpoint, the reactor trip on loss of flow in two or more RCS loops is automatically enabled.

12.

Underfrequency Reactor Coolant Pumps The Underfrequency RCPs reactor trip Function ensures that protection is provided against violating the DNBR limit due to a loss of flow in two or more RCS loops from a major network frequency disturbance. An underfrequency condition will slow down the pumps, thereby reducing their coastdown time following a pump trip. The proper coastdown time is required so that reactor heat can be removed immediately after reactor trip. The frequency of each RCP bus is monitored. Above the P-7 setpoint, a loss of frequency detected on two or more RCP buses will initiate a reactor trip. This trip Function will generate a reactor trip before the Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Two Loops) Trip Setpoint is reached.

Time delays are incorporated into the Underfrequency RCPs channels to prevent reactor trips due to momentary electrical power transients.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1 -19 Revision'No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)

The LCO requires a total of four Underfrequency RCPs channels (one per bus) to be OPERABLE.

In MODE 1 above the P-7 setpoint, the Underfrequency RCPs trip must be OPERABLE. Below the P-7 setpoint, all reactor trips on loss of flow are automatically blocked since power distributions that would cause a DNB concern at this low power level are unlikely.

Above the P-7 setpoint, the reactor trip on loss of flow in two or more RCS loops is automatically enabled.

13.

Steam Generator Water Level-Low Low The SG Water Level-Low Low trip Function ensures that protection is provided against a loss of heat sink and actuates the AFW System prior to uncovering the SG tubes. The SGs are the heat sink for the reactor. In order to act as a heat sink, the SGs must contain a minimum amount of water. A narrow range low low level in any SG is indicative of a loss of heat sink for the reactor. The level transmitters provide input to the SG Level Control System.

Therefore, the actuation logic must be able to withstand an input failure to the control system, which may then require the protection function actuation, and a single failure in the other channels providing the protection function actuation. This Function also performs the ESFAS function of starting the AFW pumps on low low SG level.

The LCO requires four channels of SG Water Level-Low Low per SG to be OPERABLE since these channels are shared between protection and control.

In MODE 1 or 2, when the reactor requires a heat sink, the SG Water Level-Low Low trip must be OPERABLE. The normal source of water for the SGs is the Main Feedwater (MFW) System (not safety related). The MFW System is normally in operation in MODES 1, 2, 3, or 4. The AFW System is the safety related backup source of water to ensure that the SGs remain the heat sink for the reactor. In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, the SG Water Level-Low Low Function does not have to be OPERABLE because the reactor is not operating or even critical. Decay heat removal is Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-20 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued) accomplished by the steam generators in MODES 3 and 4 and by the Residual Heat Removal (RHR) System in Mode 4, 5, or 6.

14.

Turbine Trip

a.

Turbine Trip-Low Fluid Oil Pressure The Turbine Trip-Low Fluid Oil Pressure trip Function anticipates the loss of heat removal capabilities of the secondary system following a turbine trip. This trip Function acts to minimize the pressure/temperature transient on the reactor. Any turbine trip from a power level below the P-9 setpoint, approximately 69% power, will not actuate a reactor trip. Four pressure switches monitor the control oil pressure in the Turbine Electrohydraulic Control System. A low pressure condition sensed by two-out-of-four pressure switches will actuate a reactor trip. These pressure switches do not provide any input to the control system. The unit is designed to withstand a complete loss of load and not sustain core damage or challenge the RCS pressure limitations. Core protection is provided by the Pressurizer Pressure-High trip Function and RCS integrity is ensured by the pressurizer safety valves. Turbine Trip-Low Fluid Oil Pressure is diverse to the Turbine Trip-Turbine Stop Valve Closure function.

The LCO requires four channels of Turbine Trip-Low Fluid Oil Pressure to be OPERABLE in MODE 1 above P-9.

Below the P-9 setpoint, a turbine trip does not actuate a reactor trip. In MODE 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, there is no potential for a turbine trip, and the Turbine Trip-Low Fluid Oil Pressure trip Function does not need to be OPERABLE.

b.

Turbine Trip-Turbine Stop Valve Closure The Turbine Trip-Turbine Stop Valve Closure trip Function anticipates the loss of heat removal capabilities of the secondary system following a turbine trip from a power level above the P-9 setpoint, approximately 69% power. The trip Function anticipates the loss of secondary heat removal Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-21 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued) capability that occurs when the stop valves close. Tripping the reactor in anticipation of loss of secondary heat removal acts to minimize the pressure and temperature transient on the reactor. This trip Function will not and is not required to operate in the presence of a single channel failure. The unit is designed to withstand a complete loss of load and not sustain core damage or challenge the RCS pressure limitations. Core protection is provided by the Pressurizer Pressure-High trip Function, and RCS integrity is ensured by the pressurizer safety valves. This trip Function is diverse to the Turbine Trip-Low Fluid Oil Pressure trip Function. Each turbine stop valve is equipped with one limit switch that inputs to the RTS. If all four limit switches indicate that the stop valves are closed, a reactor trip is initiated.

The LSSS for this Function is set to assure channel trip occurs when the associated stop valve is completely closed.

The LCO requires four Turbine Trip-Turbine Stop Valve Closure channels, one per valve, to be OPERABLE in MODE 1 above P-9. All four channels must trip to cause reactor trip.

Below the P-9 setpoint, a load rejection can be accommodated by the Steam Dump System. In MODE 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, there is no potential for a load rejection, and the Turbine Trip-Stop Valve Closure trip Function does not need to be OPERABLE.

15.

Safety Iniection Input from Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System The SI Input from ESFAS ensures that if a reactor trip has not already been generated by the RTS, the ESFAS automatic actuation logic will initiate a reactor trip upon any signal that initiates SI. This is a condition of acceptability for the LOCA.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-22 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)

However, other transients and accidents take credit or varying levels of ESF performance and rely upon rod insertion, except for the most reactive rod that is assumed to be fully withdrawn, to ensure reactor shutdown. Therefore, a reactor trip is initiated every time an SI signal is present.

Trip Setpoint and Allowable Values are not applicable to this Function. The SI Input is provided by a manual switch or by the automatic actuation logic. Therefore, there is no measurement signal with which to associate an LSSS.

The LCO requires two trains of SI Input from ESFAS to be OPERABLE in MODE 1 or 2.

A reactor trip is initiated every time an SI signal is present.

Therefore, this trip Function must be OPERABLE in MODE 1 or 2, when the reactor is critical, and must be shut down in the event of an accident. In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, the reactor is not critical, and this trip Function does not need to be OPERABLE.

16.

Reactor Trip System Interlocks Reactor protection interlocks are provided to ensure reactor trips are in the correct configuration for the current unit status. They back up operator actions to ensure protection system Functions are not bypassed during unit conditions under which the safety analysis assumes the Functions are not bypassed. Therefore, the interlock Functions do not need to be OPERABLE when the associated reactor trip functions are outside the applicable MODES. These are:

a.

Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, P-6 The Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, P-6 interlock is actuated when any NIS intermediate range channel goes approximately one decade (Westinghouse-supplied only) or three decades (Thermo Scientific-supplied only) above the minimum channel reading. If both channels drop below the setpoint, the permissive will automatically be defeated. The LCO requirement for the P-6 interlock ensures that the following Functions are performed:

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-23 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued) on increasing power, the P-6 interlock allows the manual block of the NIS Source Range, Neutron Flux reactor trip. This prevents a premature block of the source range trip and allows the operator to ensure that the intermediate range is OPERABLE prior to leaving the source range. When the source range trip is blocked, the high voltage to the detectors is also removed (Westinghouse-supplied only); and on decreasing power, the P-6 interlock automatically energizes the NIS source range detectors (Westinghouse-supplied only) and enables the NIS Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip.

The LCO requires two channels of Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, P-6 interlock to be OPERABLE in MODE 2 when below the P-6 interlock setpoint.

Above the P-6 interlock setpoint, the NIS Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip will be blocked, and this Function will no longer be necessary.

In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, the P-6 interlock does not have to be OPERABLE because the NIS Source Range is providing core protection.

b.

Low Power Reactor Trips Block, P-7 The Low Power Reactor Trips Block, P-7 interlock is actuated by input from either the Power Range Neutron Flux, P-1 0, or the Turbine Impulse Pressure, P-1 3 interlock. The LCO requirement for the P-7 interlock ensures that the following Functions are performed:

(1) on increasing power, the P-7 interlock automatically enables reactor trips on the following Functions:

Pressurizer Pressure-Low; Pressurizer Water Level-High; Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-24 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)

Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Two Loops);

Undervoltage RCPs; and Underfrequency RCPs.

These reactor trips are only required when operating above the P-7 setpoint (approximately 10% power). The reactor trips provide protection against violating the DNBR limit.

Below the P-7 setpoint, the RCS is capable of providing sufficient natural circulation without any RCP running.

(2) on decreasing power, the P-7 interlock automatically blocks reactor trips on the following Functions:

Pressurizer Pressure-Low; Pressurizer Water Level-High; Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Two Loops);

Undervoltage RCPs; and Underfrequency RCPs.

Trip Setpoint and Allowable Value are not applicable to the P-7 interlock because it is a logic Function and thus has no parameter with which to associate an LSSS.

The P-7 interlock is a logic Function with train and not channel identity. Therefore, the LCO requires one channel per train of Low Power Reactor Trips Block, P-7 interlock to be OPERABLE in MODE 1.

The low power trips are blocked below the P-7 setpoint and unblocked above the P-7 setpoint. In MODE 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, this Function does not have to be OPERABLE because the interlock performs its Function when power level drops below 10% power, which is in MODE 1.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-25 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)

c.

Power Range Neutron Flux, P-8 The Power Range Neutron Flux, P-8 interlock is actuated at approximately 48% power as determined by two-out-of-four NIS power range detectors. The P-8 interlock automatically enables the Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Single Loop) reactor trip on low flow in one or more RCS loops on increasing power. The LCO requirement for this trip Function ensures that protection is provided against a loss of flow in any RCS loop that could result in DNB conditions in the core when greater than approximately 48% power. On decreasing power below the P-8 setpoint, the reactor trip on low flow in any loop is automatically blocked.

The LCO requires four channels of Power Range Neutron Flux, P-8 interlock to be OPERABLE in MODE 1.

In MODE 1, a loss of flow in one RCS loop could result in DNB conditions, so the Power Range Neutron Flux, P-8 interlock must be OPERABLE. In MODE 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, this Function does not have to be OPERABLE because the core is not producing sufficient power to be concerned about DNB conditions.

d.

Power Range Neutron Flux, P-9 The Power Range Neutron Flux, P-9 interlock is actuated at approximately 69% power as determined by two-out-of-four NIS power range detectors. The LCO requirement for this Function ensures that the Turbine Trip-Low Fluid Oil Pressure and Turbine Trip-Turbine Stop Valve Closure reactor trips are enabled above the P-9 setpoint. Above the P-9 setpoint, a turbine trip will cause a load rejection beyond the capacity of the Steam Dump System. A reactor trip is automatically initiated on a turbine trip when it is above the P-9 setpoint, to minimize the transient on the reactor.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-26 Revision No. 7

RTS lnstrurr.ntation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)

The LCO requires four channels of Power Range Neutron Flux, P-9 interlock to be OPERABLE in MODE 1.

In MODE 1, a turbine trip could cause a load rejection beyond the capacity of the Steam Dump System, so the Power Range Neutron Flux interlock must be OPERABLE.

In MODE 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, this Function does not have to be OPERABLE because the reactor is not at a power level sufficient to have a load rejection beyond the capacity of the Steam Dump System.

e.

Power Range Neutron Flux, P-1 0 The Power Range Neutron Flux, P-10 interlock is actuated at approximately 10% power, as determined by two-out-of-four NIS power range detectors. If power level falls below 10% RTP on 3 of 4 channels, the nuclear instrument trips will be automatically unblocked. The LCO requirement for the P-10 interlock ensures that the following Functions are performed:

on increasing power, the P-10 interlock allows the operator to manually block the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux reactor trip. Note that blocking the reactor trip also blocks the signal to prevent automatic and manual rod withdrawal; on increasing power, the P-1 0 interlock allows the operator to manually block the Power Range Neutron Flux-Low reactor trip; on increasing power, the P-10 interlock automatically provides a backup signal to block the Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip, and also to de-energize the (Westinghouse-supplied only) NIS source range detectors; Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-27 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued) the P-1 0 interlock provides one of the two inputs to the P-7 interlock; and on decreasing power, the P-10 interlock automatically enables the Power Range Neutron Flux-Low reactor trip and the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux reactor trip (and rod stop):

The LCO requires four channels of Power Range Neutron Flux, P-10 interlock to be OPERABLE in MODE 1 or 2.

OPERABILITY in MODE 1 ensures the Function is available to perform its decreasing power Functions in the event of a reactor shutdown. This Function must be OPERABLE in MODE 2 to ensure that core protection is provided during a startup or shutdown by the Power Range Neutron Flux-Low and Intermediate Range Neutron Flux reactor trips. In MODE 3, 4, 5, or 6, this Function does not have to be OPERABLE because the reactor is not at power and the Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip provides core protection.

f.

Turbine Impulse Pressure, P-13 The Turbine Impulse Pressure, P-13 interlock is actuated when the pressure in the first stage of the high pressure turbine is greater than approximately 10% of the rated full power pressure. This is determined by one-out-of-two pressure detectors. The LCO requirement for this Function ensures that one of the inputs to the P-7 interlock is available.

The LCO requires two channels of Turbine Impulse Pressure, P-1 3 interlock to be OPERABLE in MODE 1.

The Turbine Impulse Chamber Pressure, P-13 interlock must be OPERABLE when the turbine generator is operating. The interlock Function is not required OPERABLE in MODE 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 because the turbine generator is not operating.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-28 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)

17.

Reactor Trip Breakers This trip Function applies to the RTBs exclusive of individual trip mechanisms. The LCO requires two OPERABLE trains of trip breakers. A trip breaker train consists of all trip breakers associated with a single RTS logic train that are racked in, closed, and capable of supplying power to the CRD System. Thus, the train may consist of the main breaker, bypass breaker, or main breaker and bypass breaker, depending upon the system configuration. Two OPERABLE trains ensure no single random failure can disable the RTS trip capability.

These trip Functions must be OPERABLE in MODE 1 or 2 when the reactor is critical. In MODE 3, 4, or 5, these RTS trip Functions must be OPERABLE when the RTBs or associated bypass breakers are closed, and the CRD System is capable of rod withdrawal.

18.

Reactor Trip Breaker Undervoltage and Shunt Trip Mechanisms The LCO requires both the Undervoltage and Shunt Trip Mechanisms to be OPERABLE for each RTB that is in service.

The trip mechanisms are not required to be OPERABLE for trip breakers that are open, racked out, incapable of supplying power to the CRD System, or declared inoperable under Function 17 above. OPERABILITY of both trip mechanisms on each breaker ensures that no single trip mechanism failure will prevent opening any breaker on a valid signal.

These trip Functions must be OPERABLE in MODE 1 or 2 when the reactor is critical. In MODE 3, 4, or 5, these RTS trip Functions must be OPERABLE when the RTBs or associated bypass breakers are closed, and the CRD System is capable of rod withdrawal.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-29 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)

19.

Automatic Trip LoQic The LCO requirement for the RTBs (Functions 17 and 18) and Automatic Trip Logic (Function 19) ensures that means are provided to interrupt the power to allow the rods to fall into the reactor core. Each RTB is equipped with an undervoltage coil and a shunt trip coil to trip the breaker open when needed. Each train RTB has a bypass breaker to allow testing of the trip breaker while the unit is at power. The reactor trip signals generated by the RTS Automatic Trip Logic cause the RTBs and associated bypass breakers to open and shut down the reactor.

The LCO requires two trains of RTS Automatic Trip Logic to be OPERABLE. Having two OPERABLE channels ensures that random failure of a single logic channel will not prevent reactor trip.

These trip Functions must be OPERABLE in MODE 1 or 2 when the reactor is critical. In MODE 3, 4, or 5, these RTS trip Functions must be OPERABLE when the RTBs and associated bypass breakers are closed, and the CRD System is capable of rod withdrawal.

The RTS instrumentation satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36 (Ref. 6).

ACTIONS A Note has been added to the ACTIONS to clarify the application of Completion Time rules. The Conditions of this Specification may be entered independently for each Function listed in Table 3.3.1-1. When the Required Channels in Table 3.3.1-1 are specified (e.g., on a per steam line, per loop, per SG, etc., basis), then the Condition may be entered separately for each steam line, loop, SG, etc., as appropriate.

A channel shall be OPERABLE if the point at which the channel trips is found more conservative than the Allowable Value. In the event a channel's trip setpoint is found less conservative than the Allowable Value, or the transmitter, instrument loop, signal processing electronics, or bistable is found inoperable, then all affected Functions provided by that channel must be declared inoperable and the LCO Condition(s) entered for the protection Function(s) affected. Unless otherwise specified, if plant conditions warrant, the trip setpoint may be set outside the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT calibration tolerance band as long as the trip setpoint is conservative with respect to the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT. If the trip setpoint is found outside of the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT calibration tolerance band and non-conservative with respect Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-30 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued) to the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT, the setpoint shall be re-adjusted.

When the number of inoperable channels in a trip Function exceed those specified in one or other related Conditions associated with a trip Function, then the unit is outside the safety analysis. Therefore, LCO 3.0.3 must be immediately entered if applicable in the current MODE of operation.

A.1 Condition A applies to all RTS protection Functions. Condition A addresses the situation where one or more required channels for one or more Functions are inoperable at the same time. The Required Action is to refer to Table 3.3.1-1 and to take the Required Actions for the protection functions affected. The Completion Times are those from the referenced Conditions and Required Actions.

B.1 and B.2 Condition B applies to the Manual Reactor Trip in MODE 1 or 2. This action addresses the train orientation of the SSPS for this Function. With one channel inoperable, the inoperable channel must be restored to OPERABLE status within 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br />. In this Condition, the remaining OPERABLE channel is adequate to perform the safety function.

The Completion Time of 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> is reasonable considering that there are two automatic actuation trains and another manual initiation channel OPERABLE, and the low probability of an event occurring during this interval.

If the Manual Reactor Trip Function cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the allowed 48 hour5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> Completion Time, the unit must be brought to a MODE in which the requirement does not apply. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 additional hours (54 hours6.25e-4 days <br />0.015 hours <br />8.928571e-5 weeks <br />2.0547e-5 months <br /> total time). The 6 additional hours are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach MODE 3 from full power operation in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems. With the unit in MODE 3, the MODE 1 and 2 requirements for this trip Function are no longer required and Condition C is entered.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-31 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued)

C.1 and C.2 Condition C applies to the following reactor trip Functions in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs closed and the CRD System capable of rod withdrawal:

Manual Reactor Trip; RTBs; RTB Undervoltage and Shunt Trip Mechanisms; and Automatic Trip Logic.

This action addresses the train orientation of the SSPS for these Functions. With one channel or train inoperable, the inoperable channel or train must be restored to OPERABLE status within 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br />. If the affected Function(s) cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the allowed 48 hour5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> Completion Time, the unit must be placed in a condition in which the requirement does not apply. To achieve this status, the RTBs must be opened within the next hour. The additional hour provides sufficient time to accomplish the action in an orderly manner. With the RTBs open, these Functions are no longer required.

The Completion Time is reasonable considering that in this Condition, the remaining OPERABLE train is adequate to perform the safety function, and given the low probability of an event occurring during this interval.

D.1.1, D.1.2, and D.2 With one of the NIS power range detectors inoperable, 1/4 of the radial power distribution monitoring capability is lost. Therefore, SR 3.2.4.2 must be performed (Required Action D. 1.1) within 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> of THERMAL POWER exceeding 75% RTP and once per 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> thereafter.

Calculating QPTR every 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> compensates for the lost monitoring capability due to the inoperable NIS power range channel and allows continued unit operation at power levels> 75% RTP. At power levels <

75% RTP, operation of the core with radial power distributions beyond the design limits, at a power level where DNB conditions may exist, is prevented. The 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> Completion Time is consistent with the Surveillance Requirement Frequency in LCO 3.2.4, "QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO (QPTR)." Required Action D.1.1 has been modified by a Note which only requires SR 3.2.4.2 to be performed if the Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-32 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued)

Power Range Neutron Flux input to QPTR becomes inoperable. Failure of a component in the Power Range Neutron Flux Channel which renders the High Flux Trip Function inoperable may not affect the capability to monitor QPTR. As such, determining QPTR using movable incore detectors may not be necessary.

Condition D applies to the Power Range Neutron Flux-High and Power Range Neutron Flux-High Positive Rate Functions.

The NIS power range detectors provide input to the CRD System and the SG Water Level Control System and, therefore, have a two-out-of-four trip logic. A known inoperable channel must be placed in the tripped condition. This results in a partial trip condition requiring only one-out-of-three logic for actuation. The 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> allowed to place the inoperable channel in the tripped condition is justified in WCAP-14333-P-A (Ref. 11).

As an alternative to the above Actions, the plant must be placed in a MODE where this Function is no longer required OPERABLE. 78 hours9.027778e-4 days <br />0.0217 hours <br />1.289683e-4 weeks <br />2.9679e-5 months <br /> are allowed to place the plant in MODE 3. The 78 hour9.027778e-4 days <br />0.0217 hours <br />1.289683e-4 weeks <br />2.9679e-5 months <br /> Completion Time includes 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> for channel corrective maintenance, and an additional 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> for the MODE reduction as required by Required Action D.2.

This is a reasonable time, based on operating experience, to reach MODE 3 from full power in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems. If Required Actions cannot be completed within their allowed Completion Times, LCO 3.0.3 must be entered.

The Required Actions have been modified by a Note that allows placing the inoperable channel in the bypass condition for up to 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> while performing routine surveillance testing of other channels. The Note also allows placing the inoperable channel in the bypass condition to allow setpoint adjustments of other channels when required to reduce the setpoint in accordance with other Technical Specifications. The 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> time limit is justified in Reference 11.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-33 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued)

E.1 and E.2 Condition E applies to the following reactor trip Functions:

Power Range Neutron Flux-Low; Overtemperature AT; Overpower AT; Pressurizer Pressure-High; and SG Water Level-Low Low.

A known inoperable channel must be placed in the tripped condition within 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />. Placing the channel in the tripped condition results in a partial trip condition requiring only one-out-of-three logic for actuation of the two-out-of-four trips. The 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> allowed to place the inoperable channel in the tripped condition is justified in Reference 11.

If the operable channel cannot be placed in the trip condition within the specified Completion Time, the unit must be placed in a MODE where these Functions are not required OPERABLE. An additional 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> is allowed to place the unit in MODE 3. Six hours is a reasonable time, based on operating experience, to place the unit in MODE 3 from full power in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.

The Required Actions have been modified by a Note that allows placing the inoperable channel in the bypassed condition for up to 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> while performing routine surveillance testing of the other channels. The 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> time limit is justified in Reference 11.

F.1 and F.2 Condition F applies to the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux trip when THERMAL POWER is above the P-6 setpoint and below the P-10 setpoint and one channel is inoperable. Above the P-6 setpoint and below Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-34 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued) the P-10 setpoint, the NIS intermediate range detector performs the monitoring Functions. If THERMAL POWER is greater than the P-6 setpoint but less than the P-10 setpoint, 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> is allowed to reduce THERMAL POWER below the P-6 setpoint or increase to THERMAL POWER above the P-10 setpoint. The NIS Intermediate Range Neutron Flux channels must be OPERABLE when the power level is above the capability of the source range, P-6, and below the capability of the power range, P-10. If THERMAL POWER is greater than the P-10 setpoint, the NIS power range detectors perform the monitoring and protection functions and the intermediate range is not required. The Completion Times allow for a slow and controlled power adjustment above P-10 or below P-6 and take into account the redundant capability afforded by the redundant OPERABLE channel, and the low probability of its failure during this period. This action does not require the inoperable channel to be tripped because the Function uses one-out-of-two logic. Tripping one channel would trip the reactor. Thus, the Required Actions specified in this Condition are only applicable when channel failure does not result in reactor trip.

G.1 and G.2 Condition G applies to two inoperable Intermediate Range Neutron Flux trip channels in MODE 2 when THERMAL POWER is above the P-6 setpoint and below the P-10 setpoint.

Required Actions specified in this Condition are only applicable when channel failures do not result in reactor trip. Above the P-6 setpoint and below the P-10 setpoint, the NIS intermediate range detector performs the monitoring Functions. With no intermediate range channels OPERABLE, the Required Actions are to suspend operations involving positive reactivity additions immediately. This will preclude any power level increase since there are no OPERABLE Intermediate Range Neutron Flux channels. The operator must also reduce THERMAL POWER below the P-6 setpoint within two hours. Below P-6, the Source Range Neutron Flux channels will be able to monitor the core power level. The Completion Time of 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> will allow a slow and controlled power reduction to less than the P-6 setpoint and takes into account the low probability of occurrence of an event during this period that may require the protection afforded by the NIS Intermediate Range Neutron Flux trip. Required Action G.1 is modified by a Note to indicate that normal plant control operations that individually add limited positive reactivity (e.g., temperature or boron fluctuations associated with RCS inventory management or temperature control) are not precluded by this Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-35 Revision No-7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued)

Action.

H. 1 Condition H applies to the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux trip when THERMAL POWER is below the P-6 setpoint and one or two channels are inoperable. Below the P-6 setpoint, the NIS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions. The inoperable NIS intermediate range channel(s) must be returned to OPERABLE status prior to increasing power above the P-6 setpoint. The NIS intermediate range channels must be OPERABLE when the power level is above the capability of the source range, P-6, and below the capability of the power range, P-10.

1.1 Condition I applies to one inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux trip channel when in MODE 2, below the P-6 setpoint, and performing a reactor startup. With the unit in this Condition, below P-6, the NIS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions. With one of the two channels inoperable, operations involving positive reactivity additions shall be suspended immediately. This will preclude any power escalation.

With only one source range channel OPERABLE, core protection is severely reduced and any actions that add positive reactivity to the core must be suspended immediately. Required Action 1.1 is modified by a Note to indicate that normal plant control operations that individually add limited positive reactivity (e.g., temperature or boron fluctuations associated with RCS inventory management or temperature control) are not precluded by this Action.

J. 1 Condition J applies to two inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux trip channels when in MODE 2, below the P-6 setpoint, and performing a reactor startup, or in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs closed and the CRD System capable of rod withdrawal. With the unit in this Condition, below P-6, the NIS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions. With both source range channels inoperable, the RTBs must be opened immediately. With the RTBs open, the core is in a more stable condition and the unit exits this Condition.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-36 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued)

K.1 and K.2 Condition K applies to one inoperable source range channel in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs closed and the CRD System capable of rod withdrawal. With the unit in this Condition, below P-6, the NIS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions. With one of the source range channels inoperable, 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> is allowed to restore it to an OPERABLE status. If the channel cannot be returned to an OPERABLE status, 1 additional hour is allowed to open the RTBs. Once the RTBs are open, the core is in a more stable condition and the unit exits this condition. The allowance of 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> to restore the channel to OPERABLE status, and the additional hour to open the RTBs, are justified in Reference 7.

L.1 and L.2 Condition L applies to the following reactor trip Functions:

Pressurizer Pressure-Low; Pressurizer Water Level-High; Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Two Loops);

Undervoltage RCPs; and Underfrequency RCPs.

With one channel inoperable, the inoperable channel must be placed in the tripped condition within 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />. Placing the channel in the tripped condition results in a partial trip condition requiring only one additional channel to initiate a reactor trip above the P-7 setpoint 7 (and below the P-8 setpoint for the Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Two Loops) Function).

These Functions do not have to be OPERABLE below the P-7 setpoint because, for the Pressurizer Water Level-High function, transients are slow enough for manual action; and for the other functions, power distributions that would cause a DNB concern at this low power level are unlikely. The 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> allowed to place the channel in the tripped Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 8.3.1-37 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued) condition is justified in Reference 11. An additional 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> is allowed to reduce THERMAL POWER to below P-7 if the inoperable channel cannot be restored to OPERABLE status or placed in trip within the specified Completion Time.

Allowance of this time interval takes into consideration the redundant capability provided by the remaining redundant OPERABLE channel, and the low probability of occurrence of an event during this period that may require the protection afforded by the Functions associated with Condition L.

The Required Actions have been modified by a Note that allows placing the inoperable channel in the bypassed condition for up to 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> while performing routine surveillance testing of the other channels. The 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> time limit is justified in Reference 11.

M.1 and M.2 Condition M applies to the Reactor Coolant Flow-Low (Single Loop) reactor trip Function. With one channel inoperable, the inoperable channel must be placed in trip within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />. If the channel cannot be restored to OPERABLE status or the channel placed in trip within the 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />, then THERMAL POWER must be reduced below the P-8 setpoint within the next 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />. This places the unit in a MODE where the LCO is no longer applicable. This trip Function does not have to be OPERABLE below the P-8 setpoint because other RTS trip Functions provide core protection below the P-8 setpoint. The 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> allowed to restore the channel to OPERABLE status or place in trip and the 4 additional hours allowed to reduce THERMAL POWER to below the P-8 setpoint are justified in Reference 7.

The Required Actions have been modified by a Note that allows placing the inoperable channel in the bypassed condition for up to 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> while performing routine surveillance testing of the other channels. The 4 hour4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> time limit is justified in Reference 7.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-38 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued)

N.1, N.2, 0.1, and 0.2 Condition N and 0 apply to Turbine Trip on Stop Valve EH Pressure Low or on Turbine Stop Valve Closure. With one channel inoperable, the inoperable channel must be placed in the trip condition within 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />. If placed in the tripped condition, this results in a partial trip condition requiring fewer additional channels to initiate a reactor trip. If the channel cannot be restored to OPERABLE status or placed in the trip condition, then power must be reduced below the P-9 setpoint within the next 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />. The 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> allowed to place the inoperable channel in the tripped condition and the 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> allowed for reducing power are justified in Reference 11.

The Required Actions of Condition N have been modified by a Note that allows placing the inoperable channel in the bypassed condition for up to 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> while performing routine surveillance testing of the other channels. The 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> time limit is justified in Reference 11.

P.1 and P.2 Condition P applies to the SI Input from ESFAS reactor trip and the RTS Automatic Trip Logic in MODES 1 and 2. These actions address the train orientation of the RTS for these Functions. With one train inoperable, 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> are allowed to restore the train to OPERABLE status (Required Action P.1) or the unit must be placed in MODE 3 within the next 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />.

The Completion Time of 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> (Required Action P.1) is reasonable considering that in this Condition, the remaining OPERABLE train is adequate to perform the safety function and given the low probability of an event during this interval. The 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> allowed to restore the inoperable RTS Automatic Trip Logic train to OPERABLE status is justified in Reference 11. The additional Completion Time of 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> (Required Action P.2) is reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach MODE 3 from full power in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.

The Required Actions have been modified by a Note that allows bypassing one train up to 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> for surveillance testing, provided the other train is OPERABLE. The 4 hour4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> time limit for testing the RTS Automatic Trip Logic train may include testing the RTB also, if both the Logic test and RTB test are conducted within the 4 hour4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> time limit. The 4 hour4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> time limit is justified in Reference 11.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-39 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued)

Q.1 and Q.2 Condition Q applies to the RTBs in MODES 1 and 2. These actions address the train orientation of the RTS for the RTBs. With one train inoperable, 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> is allowed for train corrective maintenance to restore the train to OPERABLE status or the unit must be placed in MODE 3 within the next 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time is justified in Reference 12. The Completion Time of 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach MODE 3 from full power in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems. Placing the unit in MODE 3 removes the requirement for this particular Function.

The Required Actions have been modified by a Note. The Note allows one RTB to be bypassed for up to 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> for surveillance testing, provided the other RTB is OPERABLE. The 4 hour4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> time limit is justified in Reference 12.

R.1 and R.2 Condition R applies to the P-6 and P-10 interlocks. With one or more channel(s) inoperable for one-out-of-two or two-out-of-four coincidence logic, the associated interlock must be verified to be in its required state for the existing unit condition within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> or the unit must be placed in MODE 3 within the next 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />. Verifying the interlock status, by visual observation of the control room status lights, manually accomplishes the interlock's Function. The Completion Time of 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> is based on operating experience and the minimum amount of time allowed for manual operator actions. The Completion Time of 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach MODE 3 from full power in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems. The 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> and 6 hour6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> Completion Times are equal to the time allowed by LCO 3.0.3 for shutdown actions in the event of a complete loss of RTS Function.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-40 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued)

S.1 and S.2 Condition S applies to the P-7, P-8, P-9, and P-13 interlocks. With one or more channel(s) inoperable for one-out-of-two or two-out-of-four coincidence logic, the associated interlock must be verified to be in its required state for the existing unit condition within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> or the unit must be placed in MODE 2 within the next 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />. These actions are conservative for the case where power level is being raised. Verifying the interlock status, by visual observation of the control room status lights, manually accomplishes the interlock's Function. The Completion Time of 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> is based on operating experience and the minimum amount of time allowed for manual operator actions. The Completion Time of 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach MODE 2 from full power in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.

T.1 and T.2 Condition T applies to the RTB Undervoltage and Shunt Trip Mechanisms, or diverse trip features, in MODES 1 and 2. With one of the diverse trip features inoperable, it must be restored to an OPERABLE status within 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> or the unit must be placed in a MODE where the requirement does not apply. This is accomplished by placing the unit in MODE 3 within the next 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> (54 hours6.25e-4 days <br />0.015 hours <br />8.928571e-5 weeks <br />2.0547e-5 months <br /> total time). With both diverse trip features inoperable, the reactor trip breaker is inoperable and Condition Q is entered. The Completion Time of 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> is a reasonable time, based on operating experience, to reach MODE 3 from full power in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems. With the unit in MODE 3, the MODES 1 and 2 requirement for this function is no longer required and Condition C is entered.

The Completion Time of 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> for Required Action T.1 is reasonable considering that in this Condition there is one remaining diverse feature for the affected RTB, and one OPERABLE RTB capable of performing the safety function and given the low probability of an event occurring during this interval.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-41 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES ACTIONS (continued)

U.1 With two RTS trains inoperable, no automatic capability is available to shut down the reactor, and immediate plant shutdown in accordance with LCO 3.0.3 is required.

SURVEILLANCE The SRs for each RTS Function are identified by the SRs column of REQUIREMENTS Table 3.3.1-1 for that Function.

A Note has been added to the SR Table stating that Table 3.3.1-1 determines which SRs apply to which RTS Functions.

Note that each channel of process protection supplies both trains of the RTS. When testing Channel I, Train A and Train B must be examined.

Similarly, Train A and Train B must be examined when testing Channel II, Channel III, and Channel IV (if applicable). The CHANNEL CALIBRATION and COTs are performed in a manner that is consistent with the assumptions used in analytically calculating the required channel accuracies.

Performing the Neutron Flux Instrumentation surveillances meets the License Renewal Commitments for License Renewal Program for High-Range Radiation and Neutron Flux Instrumentation Circuits per UFSAR Chapter 18, Table 18-1 and License Renewal Commitments specification CNS-1274.00-00-0016.

SR 3.3.1.1 Performance of the CHANNEL CHECK ensures that gross failure of instrumentation has not occurred. A CHANNEL CHECK is normally a comparison of the parameter indicated on one channel to a similar parameter on other channels. It is based on the assumption that instrument channels monitoring the same parameter should read approximately the same value. Significant deviations between the two instrument channels could be an indication of excessive instrument drift in one of the channels or of something even more serious. A CHANNEL CHECK will detect gross channel failure; thus, it is key to verifying that the instrumentation continues to operate properly between each CHANNEL CALIBRATION.

Agreement criteria are determined by the unit staff based on a combination of the channel instrument uncertainties, including indication Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-42 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued) and readability. If a channel is outside the criteria, it may be an indication that the sensor or the signal processing equipment has drifted outside its limit.

The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

SR 3.3.1.2 SR 3.3.1.2 compares the calorimetric heat balance calculation to the NIS channel output. If the calorimetric exceeds the NIS channel output by

> 2% RTP, the NIS is not declared inoperable, but must be adjusted. If the NIS channel output cannot be properly adjusted, the channel is declared inoperable.

Two Notes modify SR 3.3.1.2. The first Note indicates that the NIS channel output shall be adjusted consistent with the calorimetric results if the absolute difference between the NIS channel output and the calorimetric is > 2% RTP. The second Note clarifies that this Surveillance is required only if reactor power is >_ 15% RTP and that 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> is allowed for completing the first Surveillance after reaching 15% RTP. At lower power levels, calorimetric data are inaccurate.

The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

SR '3.3.1.3 SR 3.3.1.3 compares the incore system to the NIS channel output. If the absolute difference is _> 3%, the NIS channel is still OPERABLE, but must be readjusted.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-43 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

If the NIS channel cannot be properly readjusted, the channel is declared inoperable. This Surveillance is performed to verify the f(AI) input to the overtemperature AT Function and overpower AT Function.

Two Notes modify SR 3.3.1.3. Note 1 indicates that the excore NIS channel shall be adjusted if the absolute difference between the incore and excore AFD is _> 3%. Note 2 clarifies that the Surveillance is required only if reactor power is >_ 15% RTP and that 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> is allowed for completing the first Surveillance after reaching 15% RTP.

The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

SR 3.3.1.4 SR 3.3.1.4 is the performance of a TADOT. This test shall verify OPERABILITY by actuation of the end devices.

The RTB test shall include separate verification of the undervoltage and shunt trip mechanisms. Independent verification of RTB undervoltage and shunt trip Function is not required for the bypass breakers. No capability is provided for performing such a test at power. The independent test for bypass breakers is included in SR 3.3.1.14. The bypass breaker test shall include a local shunt trip. A Note has been added to indicate that this test must be performed on the bypass breaker prior to placing it in service.

The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

SR 3.3.1.5 SR 3.3.1.5 is the performance of an ACTUATION LOGIC TEST. The SSPS is tested using the semiautomatic tester. The train being tested is placed in the bypass condition, thus preventing inadvertent actuation.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-44 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

Through the semiautomatic tester, all possible logic combinations, with and without applicable permissives, are tested for each protection function. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

SR 3.3.1.6 SR 3.3.1.6 is a calibration of the excore channels to the incore channels.

If the measurements do not agree, the excore channels are not declared inoperable but must be calibrated to agree with the incore detector measurements. If the excore channels cannot be adjusted, the channels are declared inoperable. This Surveillance is performed to verify the f(AI) input to the overtemperature AT Function and overpower AT Function.

At Beginning of Cycle (BOC), the excore channels are compared to the incore detector measurements prior to exceeding 75% power. Excore detectors are adjusted as necessary. This low power surveillance satisfies the initial performance of SR 3.3.1.6 with subsequent surveillances conducted at least every 92 EFPD.

At BOC, after reaching full power steady state conditions, additional incore and excore measurements are taken and excore detectors are adjusted as necessary.

The Mj factors are normally only determined at BOC, but they may be changed at other points in the fuel cycle if the relationship between excore and incore measurements changes significantly.

A Note modifies SR 3.3.1.6. The Note states that this Surveillance is required only if reactor power is > 75% RTP and that 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> is allowed for completing the first surveillance after reaching 75% RTP.

The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

SR 3.3.1.7 SR 3.3.1.7 is the performance of a COT.

A COT is performed on each required channel to ensure the channel will Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1--45 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued) perform the intended Function.

The tested portion of the loop must trip within the Allowable Values specified in Table 3.3.1-1.

The setpoint shall be left set consistent with the assumptions of the setpoint methodology.

SR 3.3.1.7 is modified by a Note that provides a 4 hour4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> delay in the requirement to perform this Surveillance for source range instrumentation when entering MODE 3 from MODE 2. This Note allows a normal shutdown to proceed without a delay for testing in MODE 2 and for a short time in MODE 3 until the RTBs are open and SR 3.3.1.7 is no longer required to be performed. If the unit is to be in MODE 3 with the RTBs closed for > 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> this Surveillance must be completed within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after entry into MODE 3.

The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

For Functions for which TSTF-493, "Clarify Application of Setpoint Methodology for LSSS Functions" (Reference 13) has been implemented, this SR is modified by two Notes as identified in Table 3.3.1-1. The first Note requires evaluation of channel performance for the condition where the as-found setting for the channel setpoint is outside its as-found tolerance but conservative with respect to the Allowable Value.

Evaluation of channel performance will verify that the channel will continue to behave in accordance with safety analysis assumptions and the channel performance assumptions in the setpoint methodology. The purpose of the assessment is to ensure confidence in the channel performance prior to returning the channel to service. For channels determined to be OPERABLE but degraded, after returning the channel to service the performance of these channels will be evaluated under the plant Corrective Action Program. Entry into the Corrective Action Program will ensure required review and documentation of the condition.

The second Note requires that the as-left setting for the channel be returned to within the as-left tolerance of the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT (NTSP). Where a setpoint more conservative than the NTSP is used in the plant surveillance procedures (field setting), the as-left and as-found tolerances, as applicable, will be applied to the surveillance procedure setpoint. This will ensure that sufficient margin to the Safety Limit and/or Analytical Limit is maintained. If the as-left channel setting cannot be returned to a setting within the as-left tolerance of the NTSP, then the Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-46 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued) channel shall be declared inoperable. The second Note also requires that the methodologies for calculating the as-left and the as-found tolerances be in the UFSAR. The NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT definition includes a provision that would allow the as-left setting for the channel to be outside the tolerance band, provided the setting is conservative with respect to the NTSP. This provision is not applicable to Functions for which the second Note applies.

SR 3.3.1.8 SR 3.3.1.8 is the performance of a COT as described in SR 3.3.1.7, except it is modified by a Note that this test shall include verification that the P-6, during the Intermediate Range COT, and P-10, during the Power Range COT, interlocks are in their required state for the existing unit condition. The verification is performed by visual observation of the permissive status light in the unit control room. The Frequency is modified by a Note that allows this surveillance to be satisfied if it has been performed within the Frequency specified in the Surveillance Frequency Control Program or 184 days of the Frequencies prior to reactor startup and four hours after reducing power below P-10 and P-6.

The Frequency of "prior to startup" ensures this surveillance is performed prior to critical operations and applies to the source, intermediate and power range low instrument channels. The Frequency of "4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after reducing power below P-10" (applicable to intermediate and power range low channels) and "4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after reducing power below P-6" (applicable to source range channels) allows a normal shutdown to be completed and the unit removed from the MODE of Applicability for this surveillance without a delay to perform the testing required by this surveillance. The Frequency thereafter applies if the plant remains in the MODE of Applicability after the initial performances of prior to reactor startup and four hours after reducing power below P-10 or P-6. The MODE of Applicability for this surveillance is < P-10 for the power range low and intermediate range channels and < P-6 for the source range channels.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-47 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

Once the unit is in MODE 3, this surveillance is no longer required. If power is to be maintained < P-10 or < P-6 for more than 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />, then the testing required by this surveillance must be performed prior to the expiration of the 4 hour4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> limit. Four hours is a reasonable time to complete the required testing or place the unit in a MODE where this surveillance is no longer required. This test ensures that the NIS source, intermediate, and power range low channels are OPERABLE prior to taking the reactor critical and after reducing power into the applicable MODE (< P-10 or < P-6) for periods > 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

For Functions for which TSTF-493, "Clarify Application of Setpoint Methodology for LSSS Functions" (Reference 13) has been implemented, this SR is modified by two Notes as identified in Table 3.3.1-1. The first Note requires evaluation of channel performance for the condition where the as-found setting for the channel setpoint is outside its as-found tolerance but conservative with respect to the Allowable Value.

Evaluation of channel performance will verify that the channel will continue to behave in accordance with safety analysis assumptions and the channel performance assumptions in the setpoint methodology. The purpose of the assessment is to ensure confidence in the channel performance prior to returning the channel to service. For channels determined to be OPERABLE but degraded, after returning the channel to service the performance of these channels will be evaluated under the plant Corrective Action Program. Entry into the Corrective Action Program will ensure required review and documentation of the condition.

The second Note requires that the as-left setting for the channel be returned to within the as-left tolerance of the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT (NTSP). Where a setpoint more conservative than the NTSP is used in the plant surveillance procedures (field setting), the as-left and as-found tolerances, as applicable, will be applied to the surveillance procedure setpoint. This will ensure that sufficient margin to the Safety Limit and/or Analytical Limit is maintained. If the as-left channel setting cannot be returned to a setting within the as-left tolerance of the NTSP, then the channel shall be declared inoperable. The second Note also requires that the methodologies for calculating the as-left and the as-found tolerances be in the UFSAR. The NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT definition includes a provision that would allow the as-left setting for the channel to be outside the tolerance band, provided the setting is conservative with respect to the NTSP. This provision is not applicable to Functions for which the second Note applies.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-48 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

SR 3.3.1.9 SR 3.3.1.9 is the performance of a TADOT and the Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

The SR is modified by a Note that excludes verification of setpoints from the TADOT. Since this SR applies to RCP undervoltage and underfrequency relays, setpoint verification is accomplished during the CHANNEL CALIBRATION.

SR 3.3.1.10 CHANNEL CALIBRATION is a complete check of the instrument loop, including the sensor. The test verifies that the channel responds to a measured parameter within the necessary range and accuracy.

CHANNEL CALIBRATIONS must be performed consistent with the assumptions of the setpoint methodology.

The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

SR 3.3.1.10 is modified by a Note stating that this test shall include verification that the time constants are adjusted to the prescribed values where applicable. The applicable time constants are shown in Table 3.3.1-1.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-49 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

SR 3.3.1.11 SR 3.3.1.11 is the performance of a CHANNEL CALIBRATION, as described in SR 3.3.1.10. Three Notes modify this SR. Note 1 states that neutron detectors are excluded from the CHANNEL CALIBRATION.

The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the power range neutron detectors consists of a normalization of the detectors based on a power calorimetric and flux map performed above 15% RTP. The high voltage detector saturation curve is evaluated and compared to the manufacturer's data.

The Westinghouse-supplied boron triflouride (BF 3) source range neutron detectors and compensated ion chamber intermediate range neutron detectors are being replaced with Thermo Scientific-supplied fission chamber source and intermediate range neutron detectors. The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the BF 3 source range and compensated ion chamber intermediate range neutron detectors consists of obtaining the high voltage detector plateau and discriminator curves for source range, and the high voltage detector plateau for intermediate range, evaluating those curves, and comparing the curves to the manufacturer's data. The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the fission chamber source and intermediate range neutron detectors consists of verifying that the channels respond correctly to test inputs with the necessary range and accuracy. Note 2 states that this Surveillance is not required for the NIS power range detectors for entry into MODE 2 or 1. Note 3 applies to the compensated ion chamber intermediate range neutron detectors, and states that this Surveillance is not required to be performed for entry into MODE 2 or 1. Notes 2 and 3 are required because the unit must be in at least MODE 2 to perform the test for the compensated ion chamber intermediate range detectors and MODE 1 for the power range detectors.

The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-50 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

For Functions for which TSTF-493, "Clarify Application of Setpoint Methodology for LSSS Functions" (Reference 13) has been implemented, this SR is modified by two Notes as identified in Table 3.3.1-1. The first Note requires evaluation of channel performance for the condition where the as-found setting for the channel setpoint is outside its as-found tolerance but conservative with respect to the Allowable Value.

Evaluation of channel performance will verify that the channel will continue to behave in accordance with safety analysis assumptions and the channel performance assumptions in the setpoint methodology. The purpose of the assessment is to ensure confidence in the channel performance prior to returning the channel to service. For channels determined to be OPERABLE but degraded, after returning the channel to service the performance of these channels will be evaluated under the plant Corrective Action Program. Entry into the Corrective Action Program will ensure required review and documentation of the condition.

The second Note requires that the as-left setting for the channel be returned to within the as-left tolerance of the NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT (NTSP). Where a setpoint more conservative than the NTSP is used in the plant surveillance procedures (field setting), the as-left and as-found tolerances, as applicable, will be applied to the surveillance procedure setpoint. This will ensure that sufficient margin to the Safety Limit and/or Analytical Limit is maintained. If the as-left channel setting cannot be returned to a setting within the as-left tolerance of the NTSP, then the channel shall be declared inoperable. The second Note also requires that the methodologies for calculating the as-left and the as-found tolerances be in the UFSAR. The NOMINAL TRIP SETPOINT definition includes a provision that would allow the as-left setting for the channel to be outside the tolerance band, provided the setting is conservative with respect to the NTSP. This provision is not applicable to Functions for which the second Note applies.

SR 3.3.1.12 SR 3.3.1.12 is the performance of a CHANNEL CALIBRATION, as described in SR 3.3.1.10.

The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-51 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

SR 3.3.1.13 SR 3.3.1.13 is the performance of a COT of RTS interlocks.

The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

SR 3.3.1.14 SR 3.3.1.14 is the performance of a TADOT of the Manual Reactor Trip and the SI Input from ESFAS. The test shall independently verify the OPERABILITY of the undervoltage and shunt trip mechanisms for the Manual Reactor Trip Function for the Reactor Trip Breakers and Reactor Trip Bypass Breakers. The Reactor Trip Bypass Breaker test shall include testing of the automatic undervoltage trip.

The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

The SR is modified by a Note that excludes verification of setpoints from the TADOT. The Functions affected have no setpoints associated with them.

SR 3.3.1.15 SR 3.3.1.15 is the performance of a TADOT of Turbine Trip Functions.

This TADOT is as described in SR 3.3.1.4, except that this test is performed prior to reactor startup. A Note states that this Surveillance is not required if it has been performed within the previous 31 days.

Verification of the Trip Setpoint does not have to be performed for this Surveillance. Performance of this test will ensure that the turbine trip Function is OPERABLE prior to taking the reactor critical.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-52 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

SR 3.3.1.16 and SR 3.3.1.17 SR 3.3.1.16 and SR 3.3.1.17 verify that the individual channel/train actuation response times are less than or equal to the maximum values assumed in the accident analysis. Response time testing acceptance criteria are included in the UFSAR (Ref. 1). Individual component response times are not modeled in the analyses.

The analyses model the overall or total elapsed time, from the point at which the parameter exceeds the trip setpoint value at the sensor to the point at which the equipment reaches the required functional state (i.e.,

control and shutdown rods fully inserted in the reactor core).

For channels that include dynamic transfer Functions (e.g., lag, lead/lag, rate/lag, etc.), the response time test may be performed with the transfer Function set to one, with the resulting measured response time compared to the appropriate UFSAR response time. Alternately, the response time test can be performed with the time constants set to their nominal value, provided the required response time is analytically calculated assuming the time constants are set at their nominal values. The response time may be measured by a series of overlapping tests such that the entire response time is measured.

Response time may be verified by actual response time tests in any series of sequential, overlapping or total channel measurements, or by the summation of allocated sensor, signal processing and actuation logic response times with actual response time tests on the remainder of the channel. Allocations for sensor response times may be obtained from:

(1) historical records based on acceptable response time tests (hydraulic, noise, or power interrupt tests), (2) in place, onsite, or offsite (e.g.

vendor) test measurements, or (3) utilizing vendor engineering specifications. WCAP-13632-P-A Revision 2, "Elimination of Pressure Sensor Response Time Testing Requirements" provides the basis and methodology for using allocated sensor response times in the overall verification of the channel response time for specific sensors identified in the WCAP. In addition, while not specifically identified in the WCAP, ITT Barton 386A and 580A-0 sensors were compared to sensors which were identified. It was concluded that the WCAP results could be applied to these two sensor types as well. Response time verification for other sensor types must be demonstrated by test.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-53 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

WCAP-14036-P-A Revision 1, "Elimination of Periodic Protection Channel Response Time Tests" provides the basis and methodology for using allocated signal processing and actuation logic response times in the overall verification of the protection system channel response time.

The allocations for sensor, signal conditioning and actuation logic response times must be verified prior to placing the component in operational service and re-verified following maintenance that may adversely affect response time. In general, electrical repair work does not impact response time provided the parts used for repair are of the same type and value. Specific components identified in the WCAP may be replaced without verification testing. One example where response time could be affected is replacing the sensing assembly of a transmitter.

The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

SR 3.3.1.16 is modified by a Note stating that neutron detectors are excluded from RTS RESPONSE TIME testing. This Note is necessary because of the difficulty in generating an appropriate detector input signal. Excluding the detectors is acceptable because the principles of detector operation ensure a virtually instantaneous response. The response time of the neutron flux signal portion of the channel shall be measured from detector output or input of the first electronic component in the channel.

REFERENCES

1. UFSAR, Chapter 7.
2. UFSAR, Chapter 6.
3. UFSAR, Chapter 15.
4. IEEE-279-1971.
5. 10 CFR 50.49.
6. 10 CFR 50.36, Technical Specifications, (c)(2)(ii).

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-54 Revision No. 7

RTS Instrumentation B 3.3.1 BASES REFERENCES (continued)

7. WCAP-10271-P-A, Supplement 2, Rev. 1, June 1990.
8. WCAP-13632-P-A Revision 2, "Elimination of Pressure Sensor Response Time Testing Requirements" Sep., 1995.
9. WCAP-14036-P-A Revision 1, "Elimination of Periodic Protection Channel Response Time Tests" Oct., 1998.

10.10 CFR 50.67.

11.WCAP-14333-P-A, Rev. 1, October 1998.

12.WCAP-15376-P-A, Rev. 1, March 2003.

13. Technical Specification Task Force, Improved Standard Technical Specifications Change Traveler, TSTF-493, "Clarify Application of Setpoint Methodology for LSSS Functions" Revision 4.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.3.1-55 Revision No. 7

NSWS B 3.7.8 B 3.7 PLANT SYSTEMS B 3.7.8 Nuclear Service Water System (NSWS)

BASES BACKGROUND The NSWS, including Lake Wylie and the Standby Nuclear Service Water Pond (SNSWP), provides a heat sink for the removal of process and operating heat from safety related components during a Design Basis Accident (DBA) or transient. During normal operation, and a normal shutdown, the NSWS also provides this function for various safety related and nonsafety related components. The safety related function is covered by this LCO.

The NSWS consists of two independent loops (A and B) of essential equipment, each of which is shared between units. Each loop contains two NSWS pumps, each of which is supplied from a separate emergency diesel generator. Each set of two pumps supplies two trains (1A and 2A, or 1 B and 2B) of essential equipment through common discharge piping.

While the pumps are unit designated, i.e., 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, all pumps receive automatic start signals from a safety injection or blackout signal from either unit. Therefore, a pump designated to one unit will supply post accident cooling to equipment in that loop 'on both units, provided its associated emergency diesel generator is available. For example, the 1A NSWS pump, supplied by emergency diesel 1A, will supply post accident cooling to NSWS trains 1A and 2A.

One NSWS loop containing two OPERABLE NSWS pumps has sufficient capacity to supply post loss of coolant accident (LOCA) loads on one unit and shutdown and cooldown loads on the other unit. Thus, the OPERABILITY of two NSWS loops assures that no single failure will keep the system from performing the required safety function.

Additionally, one NSWS loop containing one OPERABLE NSWS pump has sufficient capacity to maintain one unit indefinitely in MODE 5 (commencing 36 hours4.166667e-4 days <br />0.01 hours <br />5.952381e-5 weeks <br />1.3698e-5 months <br /> following a trip from RTP) while supplying the post LOCA loads of the other unit. Thus, after a unit has been placed in MODE 5, only one NSWS pump and its associated emergency diesel generator are required to be OPERABLE on each loop, in order for the system to be capable of performing its required safety function, including single failure considerations.

Additional information about the design and operation of the NSWS, along with a list of the components served, is presented in the UFSAR, Section 9.2.1 (Ref. 1). The principal safety related function of the NSWS is the removal of decay heat from the reactor via the CCW System.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.8-1 Revision No. 4

NSWS B 3.7.8 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES The design basis of the NSWS is for one NSWS train, in conjunction with the CCW System and a containment spray system, to remove core decay heat following a design basis LOCA as discussed in the UFSAR, Section 6.2 (Ref. 2). This prevents the containment sump fluid from increasing in temperature during the recirculation phase following a LOCA and provides for a gradual reduction in the temperature of this fluid as it is supplied to the Reactor Coolant System by the ECCS pumps.

The NSWS is designed to perform its function with a single failure of any active component, assuming the loss of offsite power.

The NSWS, in conjunction with the CCW System, also cools the unit from residual heat removal (RHR), as discussed in the UFSAR, Section 5.4 (Ref. 3), from RHR entry conditions to MODE 5 during normal and post accident operations. The time required for this evolution is a function of the number of CCW and RHR System trains that are operating. Thirty six hours after a trip from RTP, one NSWS train is sufficient to remove decay heat during subsequent operations in MODES 5 and 6. This assumes a maximum NSWS temperature, a simultaneous design basis event on the other unit, and the loss of offsite power.

The NSWS satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36 (Ref. 4).

LCO Two NSWS trains are required to be OPERABLE to provide the required redundancy to ensure that the system functions to remove post accident heat loads, assuming that the worst case single active failure occurs coincident with the loss of offsite power.

While the NSWS is operating in the normal dual supply header alignment, an NSWS train is considered OPERABLE during MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4 when:

a.
1.

Both NSWS pumps on the NSWS loop are OPERABLE; or

2.

One unit's NSWS pump is OPERABLE and one unit's flowpath to the non essential header, AFW pumps, and Containment Spray heat exchangers are isolated (or equivalent flow restrictions); and

b.

The associated piping, valves, and instrumentation and controls required to perform the safety related function are OPERABLE.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.8-2 Revision No'. 4

NSWS B 3.7.8 BASES LCO (continued)

While the NSWS is operating in the single supply header alignment, one of the supply headers is removed from service in support of planned maintenance or modification activities associated with the supply header that is taken out of service. In this configuration, each NSWS train is considered OPERABLE with the required NSWS flow to safety related equipment being fed through the remaining OPERABLE NSWS supply header. While the NSWS is operating in the single supply header alignment, an NSWS train is considered OPERABLE during MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4 when:

a.

The associated train related NSWS pumps are OPERABLE; and

b.

The associated piping (except for the supply header that is taken out of service), valves, and instrumentation and controls required to perform the safety related function are OPERABLE.

The NSWS system is shared between the two units. The shared portions of the system must be OPERABLE for each unit when that unit is in the MODE of Applicability. Additionally, both normal and emergency power for shared components must also be OPERABLE. If a shared NSWS component becomes inoperable, or normal or emergency power to shared components becomes inoperable, then the Required Actions of this LCO must be entered independently for each unit that is in the MODE of applicability of the LCO, except as noted in a.2 above for operation in the normal dual supply header alignment. In this case, sufficient flow is available, however, this configuration results in inoperabilities within other required systems on one unit and the associated Required Actions must be entered. Use of a NSWS pump and associated diesel generator on a shutdown unit to support continued operation (> 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />) of a unit with an inoperable NSWS pump is prohibited. A shutdown unit supplying its associated emergency power source (1 EMXG/2EMXH) cannot be credited for OPERABILITY of components supporting the operating unit.

APPLICABILITY In MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4, the NSWS is a normally operating system that is required to support the OPERABILITY of the equipment serviced by the NSWS and required to be OPERABLE in these MODES.

In MODES 5 and 6, the requirements of the NSWS are determined by the systems it supports.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.8-3 Revision No. 4

NSWS B 3.7.8 BASES ACTIONS A. 1 If one NSWS train is inoperable, action must be taken to restore OPERABLE status within 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />. In this Condition, the remaining OPERABLE NSWS train is adequate to perform the heat removal function. However, the overall reliability is reduced because a single failure in the OPERABLE NSWS train could result in loss of NSWS function. Due to the shared nature of the NSWS, both units are required to enter a 72 hour8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> Action when a NSWS Train becomes inoperable on either unit. Required Action A.1 is modified by two Notes. The first Note indicates that the applicable Conditions and Required Actions of LCO 3.8.1, "AC Sources-Operating," should be entered if an inoperable NSWS train results in an inoperable emergency diesel generator. The second Note indicates that the applicable Conditions and Required Actions of LCO 3.4.6, "RCS Loops-MODE 4," should be entered if an inoperable NSWS train results in an inoperable decay heat removal train (RHR). An example of when these Notes should be applied is with both units' loop 'A' NSWS pumps inoperable, both units' 'A' emergency diesel generators and both units' 'A' RHR systems should be declared inoperable and appropriate Actions entered. This is an exception to LCO 3.0.6 and ensures the proper actions are taken for these components. The 72 hour8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> Completion Time is based on the redundant capabilities afforded by the OPERABLE train; and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this time period.

B.1 If one NSWS supply header is inoperable due to the NSWS being aligned for single supply header operation, the NSWS supply header must be restored to OPERABLE status within 30 days. Dual supply header operation is the normal alignment of the NSWS. The Completion Time of 30 days is supported by probabilistic risk analysis. While in Condition B, the single supply header is adequate to perform the heat removal function for all required safety related equipment for both safety trains.

Due to the shared nature of the NSWS, both units are required to enter this Condition when the NSWS is aligned for single supply header operation. In order to prevent the potential for NSWS pump runout, the single NSWS pump flow balance alignment is prohibited while the NSWS is aligned for single supply header operation.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.8-4 Revision No. 4

NSWS B 3.7.8 BASES ACTIONS (continued)

Condition B is modified by three Notes. Note 1 states that entry into this Condition shall only be allowed for pre-planned activities as described in the Bases of this Specification. Condition B is only allowed to be entered in support of planned maintenance or modification activities associated with the supply header that is taken out of service. An example of a situation for which entry into this Condition is allowed is refurbishment of a supply header. Entry into this Condition is not allowed in response to unplanned events or for other events involving the NSWS. Examples of situations for which entry into this Condition is prohibited are emergent repair of discovered piping leaks and other component failures. For unplanned events or oth-erevents involving the NSWS, Condition A must be entered. Note 2 requires immediate entry into Condition A of this LCO if one or more NSWS components become inoperable while in this Condition and one NSWS train remains OPERABLE. With one remaining OPERABLE NSWS train, the NSWS can still perform its safety related function. However, with one inoperable NSWS train, the NSWS cannot be assured of performing its safety related function in the event of a single failure of another NSWS component. The most limiting single failure is the failure of an NSWS pit to automatically transfer from Lake Wylie to the SNSWP during a seismic event. While the loss of any NSWS component subject to the requirements of this LCO can result in the entry into Condition A, the most common example is the inoperability of an NSWS pump. This occurs during periodic testing of the emergency diesel generators. Inoperability of an emergency diesel generator renders its associated NSWS pump inoperable. Note 3 requires immediate entry into LCO 3.0.3 if one or more NSWS components become inoperable while in this Condition and no NSWS train remains OPERABLE. In this case, the NSWS cannot perform its safety related function.

C.1 and C.2 If the NSWS train cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the associated Completion Time, or if the NSWS supply header cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the associated Completion Time, the unit must be placed in a MODE in which the LCO does not apply. To achieve this status, the unit must be placed in at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> and in MODE 5 within 36 hours4.166667e-4 days <br />0.01 hours <br />5.952381e-5 weeks <br />1.3698e-5 months <br />.

The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.8-5 Revision No. 4

NSWS B 3.7.8 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.7.8.1 REQUIREMENTS This SR is modified by a Note indicating that the isolation of the NSWS components or systems may render those components inoperable, but does not affect the OPERABILITY of the NSWS.

Verifying the correct alignment for manual, power operated, and automatic valves in the NSWS flow path provides assurance that the proper flow paths exist for NSWS operation. This SR does not apply to valves that are locked, sealed, or otherwise secured in position, since they are verified to be in the correct position prior to being locked, sealed, or secured. This SR does not require any testing or valve manipulation; rather, it involves verification that those valves capable of being mispositioned are in the correct position. This SR does not apply to valves that cannot be inadvertently misaligned, such as check valves.

The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

SR 3.7.8.2 This SR verifies proper automatic operation of the NSWS valves on an actual or simulated actuation signal. The signals that cause the actuation are from Safety Injection and Phase 'B' isolation. The NSWS is a normally operating system that cannot be fully actuated as part of normal testing. This Surveillance is not required for valves that are locked, sealed, or otherwise secured in the required position under administrative controls. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

This SR is modified by a Note that states that the SR is not required to be met for valves that are maintained in position to support NSWS single supply header operation. When the NSWS is placed in this alignment, certain automatic valves in the system are maintained in position and will not automatically reposition in response to an actuation signal while the NSWS is in this alignment.

Catawba Units 1 and 2

-B 3.7.8-6 Revision No. 4,

NSWS B 3.7.8 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

SR 3.7.8.3 This SR verifies proper automatic operation of the NSWS pumps on an actual or simulated actuation signal. The signals that cause the actuation are from Safety Injection and Loss of Offsite Power. The NSWS is a normally operating system that cannot be fully actuated as part of normal testing during normal operation. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

REFERENCES

1.

UFSAR, Section 9.2.

2.

UFSAR, Section 6.2.

3.

UFSAR, Section 5.4.

4.

10 CFR 50.36, Technical Specifications, (c)(2)(ii).

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.8-7 Revision*No. 4

CRAVS B 3.7.10 B 3.7 PLANT SYSTEMS B 3.7.10 Control Room Area Ventilation System (CRAVS)

BASES BACKGROUND The CRAVS ensures that the Control Room Envelope (CRE) will remain habitable for occupants during and following all credible accident conditions. This function is accomplished by pressurizing the CRE to >

1/8 (0.125) inch water gauge with respect to all surrounding areas, filtering the outside air used for pressurization, and filtering a portion of the return air from the CRE to clean up the control room environment.

The CRAVS consists of two independent, redundant trains of equipment.

Each train consists of:

a pressurizing filter train fan (1 CRA-PFTF-1 or 2CRA-PFTF-1) a filter unit (1CRA-PFT-1 or 2CRA-PFT-1) which includes moisture separator/prefilters, HEPA filters, and carbon adsorbers the associated ductwork, dampers/valves, controls, doors, and barriers Inherent in the CRAVS ability to pressurize the control room is the control room envelope boundary. The CRE is the area within the confines of the CRE boundary that contains the spaces that control room occupants inhabit to control the unit during normal and accident conditions. This area encompasses the control room, and may encompass the non-critical areas to which frequent personnel access or continuous occupancy is not necessary in the event of an accident. The CRE is protected during the normal operation, natural events, and accident conditions. The CRE boundary is the combination of walls, floor, roof, ducting, doors, penetrations and equipment that physically form the CRE. The OPERABILITY of the CRE boundary must be maintained to ensure that the inleakage of unfiltered air into the CRE will not exceed the inleakage assumed in the licensing basis analysis of design basis accident (DBA) consequences to CRE occupants. The CRE and its boundary are defined in the Control Room Envelope Habitability Program. These boundaries must be intact or properly isolated for the CRAVS to function properly.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7. 10-1 Revision No. 10

CRAVS B 3.7.10 BASES BACKGROUND (continued)

The CRAVS can be operated either manually or automatically. Key operated selector switches located in the CRE initiate operation of all train related CRAVS equipment. The selected train is in continuous operation. Outside air for pressurization and makeup to the CRE is supplied from two independent intakes. This outside air is mixed with return air from the CRE before being passed through the filter unit. In the filter unit, moisture separator/prefilters remove any large particles in the air, and any entrained water droplets present. A HEPA filter bank upstream of the carbon adsorber filter bank functions to remove particulates and a second bank of HEPA filters follow the carbon adsorber to collect carbon fines. Only the upstream HEPA filters and carbon adsorber bank are credited in the analysis. A heater is included within each filter train to reduce the relative humidity of the airstream, although no credit is taken in the safety analysis. The heaters are not required for OPERABILITY since the carbon laboratory tests are performed at 95% relative humidity, but have been maintained in the system to provide additional margin (Ref. 9). Continuous operation of each train for at least 10 hours1.157407e-4 days <br />0.00278 hours <br />1.653439e-5 weeks <br />3.805e-6 months <br /> per month, with the heaters on, reduces moisture buildup on the HEPA filters and adsorbers.

Upon receipt of an Engineered Safety Feature (ESF) signal, the selected CRAVS train continues to operate and the pressurizing filter train fan of the non-selected train is started. This assures control room pressurization, assuming an active failure of one of the pressurizing filter train fans.

The outside air for pressurization is continuously monitored for the presence of smoke, radiation, or chlorine by non-safety related detectors.

If smoke, radiation, or chlorine is detected in an outside air intake, an alarm is received within the CRE, alerting the operators of this condition.

The operator will take the required action to close the affected intake, if necessary, per the guidance of the Annunciator Response Procedures.

A single CRAVS train is capable of pressurizing the CRE to greater than or equal to 0.125 inches water gauge. The CRAVS is designed in accordance with Seismic Category 1 requirements. The CRAVS operation in maintaining the CRE habitable is discussed in the UFSAR, Sections 6.4 and 9.4.1 (Refs. 1 and 2).

The CRAVS is designed to maintain a habitable environment in the CRE for 30 days of continuous occupancy after a DBA without exceeding a 5 rem total effective dose equivalent (TEDE).

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.10-2 Revision No. 10

CRAVS B 3.7.10 BASES APPLICABLE The CRAVS components are arranged in redundant, safety related SAFETY ANALYSES ventilation trains. The CRAVS provides airborne radiological protection for the CRE occupants, as demonstrated by the CRE occupant dose analyses for the most limiting design basis loss of coolant accident, fission product release presented in the UFSAR, Chapter 15 (Ref. 3).

The CRAVS provides protection from smoke and hazardous chemicals to CRE occupants. The analysis of hazardous chemical releases demonstrates that the toxicity limits are not exceeded in the CRE following a hazardous chemical release (Ref. 1). The evaluation of a smoke challenge demonstrates that it will not result in the inability of the CRE occupants to control the reactor either from the control room or from the remote shutdown panels (Ref. 9).

The worst case single active failure of a component of the CRAVS, assuming a loss of offsite power, does not impair the ability of the system to perform its design function.

The CRAVS satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36 (Ref. 4).

LCO Two independent and redundant CRAVS trains are required to be OPERABLE to ensure that at least one is available assuming a single active failure disables the other train. Total system failure, such as from a loss of both ventilation trains or from an inoperable CRE boundary, could result in exceeding a dose of 5 rem to the CRE occupants in the event of a large radioactive release.

Each CRAVS train is considered OPERABLE when the individual components necessary to limit CRE occupant exposure are OPERABLE in both trains. A CRAVS train is OPERABLE when the associated:

a.

Pressurizing filter train fan is OPERABLE;

b.

HEPA filters and carbon adsorbers are not excessively restricting flow, and are capable of performing their filtration functions; and

c.

Ductwork, valves, and dampers are OPERABLE, and air circulation can be maintained.

In order for the CRAVS trains to be considered OPERABLE, the CRE boundary must be maintained such that the CRE occupant dose from a large radioactive release does not exceed the calculated dose in the licensing basis consequence analyses for DBAs, and that the CRE occupants are protected from hazardous chemicals and smoke.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.10-3 Revision No. 10

CRAVS B 3.7.10 BASES LCO (continued)

The CRAVS is shared between the two units. The system must be OPERABLE for each unit when that unit is in the MODE of Applicability.

Additionally, both normal and emergency power must also be OPERABLE because the system is shared. A shutdown unit supplying its associated emergency power source (1 EMXG/2EMXH) cannot be credited for OPERABILITY of components supporting the operating unit.

If a CRAVS component becomes inoperable, or normal or emergency power to a CRAVS component becomes inoperable, then the Required Actions of this LCO must be entered independently for each unit that is in the MODE of Applicability of the LCO.

The LCO is modified by a Note allowing the CRE boundary to be opened intermittently under administrative controls. This Note only applies to openings in the CRE boundary that can be rapidly restored to the design condition, such as doors, hatches, floor plugs, and access panels. For entry and exit through doors, the administrative control of the opening is performed by the person(s) entering or exiting the area. For other openings, these controls should be proceduralized and consist of stationing a dedicated individual at the opening who is in continuous communication with the operators in the CRE. This individual will have a method to rapidly close the opening and to restore the CRE boundary to a condition equivalent to the design condition when a need for CRE isolation is indicated.

APPLICABILITY In MODES 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the CRAVS must be OPERABLE to ensure that the CRE will remain habitable during and following a DBA.

During movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, the CRAVS must be OPERABLE to cope with the release from a fuel handling accident.

ACTIONS A. 1 When one CRAVS train is inoperable for reasons other than an inoperable CRE boundary, action must be taken to restore OPERABLE status within 7 days. In this Condition, the remaining OPERABLE CRAVS train is adequate to perform the CRE protection function.

However, the overall reliability is reduced because a single failure in the-OPERABLE CRAVS train could result in loss of CRAVS function. The 7 day Completion Time is based on the low probability of a DBA occurring during this time period, and ability of the remaining train to provide the required capability.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.10-4 Revision No. 10

CRAVS B 3.7.10 BASES ACTIONS (continued)

B.1, B.2, and B.3 If the unfiltered inleakage of potentially contaminated air past the CRE boundary and into the CRE can result in CRE occupant radiological dose greater than the calculated dose of the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences (allowed to be up to 5 rem TEDE), or inadequate protection of CRE occupants from hazardous chemicals or smoke, the CRE boundary is inoperable. Actions must be taken to restore an OPERABLE CRE boundary within 90 days.

During the period that the CRE boundary is considered inoperable, action must be initiated to implement mitigating actions to lessen the effect on CRE occupants from the potential hazards of a radiological or chemical event or a challenge from smoke. Actions must be taken within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> to verify that in the event of a DBA, the mitigating actions will ensure that CRE occupant radiological exposures will not exceed the calculated dose of the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences, and that CRE occupants are protected from hazardous chemicals and smoke. These mitigating actions (i.e., actions that are taken to offset the consequences of the inoperable CRE boundary) should be preplanned for implementation upon entry into the condition, regardless of whether entry is intentional or unintentional. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time is reasonable based on the low probability of a DBA occurring during this time period, and the use of mitigating actions. The 90 day Completion Time is reasonable based on the determination that the mitigating actions will ensure protection of CRE occupants within analyzed limits while limiting the probability that CRE occupants will have to implement protective measures that may adversely affect their ability to control the reactor and maintain it in a safe shutdown condition in the event of a DBA. In addition, the 90 day Completion Time is reasonable time to diagnose, plan and possibly repair, and test most problems with the CRE boundary.

C.1 and C.2 In MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, if the inoperable CRAVS or CRE boundary train cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the required Completion Time, the unit must be placed in a MODE that minimizes accident risk.

To achieve this status, the unit must be placed in at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />, and in MODE 5 within 36 hours4.166667e-4 days <br />0.01 hours <br />5.952381e-5 weeks <br />1.3698e-5 months <br />. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.1.-.10-5 Revision No. 10

CRAVS B 3.7.10 BASES ACTIONS (continued)

D.1 In MODE 5 or 6, if the inoperable CRAVS train cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the required Completion Time, or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, action must be taken to immediately place the OPERABLE CRAVS train in operation. This action ensures that the operating (or running) train is OPERABLE, that no failures preventing automatic actuation will occur, and that any active failure would be readily detected.

An alternative to Required Action D.1 is to immediately suspend activities that could result in a release of radioactivity that might require isolation of the CRE. This places the unit in a condition that minimizes risk. This does not preclude the movement of fuel to a safe position.

E.1 In MODE 5 or 6, or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, with two CRAVS trains inoperable, or with one or more CRAVS trains inoperable due to an inoperable CRE boundary, action must be taken immediately to suspend activities that could result in a release of radioactivity that might require isolation of the CRE. This places the unit in a condition that minimizes the accident risk. This does not preclude the movement of fuel to a safe position.

F. 1 If both CRAVS trains are inoperable in MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, for reasons other than Condition B, the CRAVS may not be capable of performing the intended function and the unit is in a condition outside the accident analyses. Therefore, LCO 3.0.3 must be entered immediately.

G.1 and G.2 With one or more CRAVS heaters inoperable, the heater must be restored to OPERABLE status within 7 days. Alternatively, a report must be initiated per Specification 5.6.6, which details the reason for the heater's inoperability and the corrective action required to return the heater to OPERABLE status.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.10-6 Revision No. 10

  • CRAVS B 3.7.10 BASES ACTIONS (continued)

The heaters do not affect OPERABILITY of the CRAVS filter trains because carbon adsorber efficiency testing is performed at 30'C and 95% relative humidity. The accident analysis shows that site boundary and control room operator radiation doses are within 10 CFR 50.67 limits during a DBA LOCA under these conditions.

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.7.10.1 REQUIREMENTS Standby systems should be checked periodically to ensure that they function properly. As the environment and normal operating conditions on this system are not too severe, testing each train once every month provides an adequate check of this system. Monthly heater operations dry out any moisture accumulated in the carbon from humidity in the ambient air. Systems with heaters must be operated from the control room for _> 10 continuous hours with the heaters energized and flow through the HEPA filters and carbon adsorbers. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

SR 3.7.10.2 This SR verifies that the required CRAVS testing is performed in accordance with the Ventilation Filter Testing Program (VFTP). The CRAVS filter tests are in accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.52 (Ref. 5).

The VFTP includes testing the performance of the HEPA filter and carbon adsorber efficiencies and the physical properties of the activated carbon.

Specific test Frequencies and additional information are discussed in detail in the VFTP.

SR 3.7.10.3 This SR verifies that each CRAVS train starts and operates on an actual or simulated actuation signal. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

Catawba*Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.10-7 Revision No. 10

CRAVS B 3.7.10 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

SR 3.7.10.4 This SR verifies the OPERABILITY of the CRE boundary by testing for unfiltered air inleakage past the CRE boundary and into the CRE. The details of the testing are specified in the Control Room Envelope Habitability Program.

The CRE is considered habitable when the radiological dose to CRE occupants calculated in the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences is no more than 5 rem TEDE and the CRE occupants are protected from hazardous chemicals and smoke. This SR verifies that the unfiltered air inleakage into the CRE is no greater than the flow rate assumed in the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences. When unfiltered air inleakage is greater than the assumed flow rate, Condition B must be entered. Required Action B.3 allows time to restore the CRE boundary to OPERABLE status provided mitigating actions can ensure that the CRE remains within the licensing basis habitability limits for the occupants following an accident. Compensatory measures are discussed in Regulatory Guide 1.196, Section C.2.7.3 (Ref. 9), which endorses, with exceptions, NEI 99-03, Section 8.4 and Appendix F (Ref. 7). These compensatory measures may also be used as mitigating actions as required by Required Action B.2. Temporary analytical methods may also be used as compensatory measures to restore OPERABILITY (Ref.

8). Options for restoring the CRE boundary to OPERABLE status include changing the licensing basis DBA consequence analysis, repairing the CRE boundary, or a combination of these actions. Depending upon the nature of the problem and the corrective action, a full scope inleakage test may not be necessary to establish that the CRE boundary has been restored to OPERABLE status.

REFERENCES

1.

UFSAR, Section 6.4.

2.

UFSAR, Section 9.4.1.

3.

UFSAR, Chapter 15.

4.

10 CFR 50.36, Technical Specifications, (c)(2)(ii).

5.

Regulatory Guide 1.52, Rev. 2.

6.

Catawba Nuclear Station License Amendments 90/84 for Units 1/2, August 23, 1991.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.10-8 Revision No. 10

CRAVS B 3.7.10 BASES REFERENCES (continued)

7.

NEI 99-03, "Control Room Habitability Assessment", June 2001.

8.

Letter from Eric J. Leeds (NRC) to James W. Davis (NEI) dated January 30, 2004, "NEI Draft White Paper, Use of Generic Letter 91-18 Process and Alternative Source Terms in the Context of Control Room Habitability", (ADAMS Accession No. ML040300694).

9.

Regulatory Guide 1.196, Rev. 1.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.10-9 Revision No. 10

CRACWS B 3.7.11 B 3.7 PLANT SYSTEMS B 3.7.11 Control Room Area Chilled Water System (CRACWS)

BASES BACKGROUND The CRACWS provides temperature control for the control room and the control room area.

The CRACWS consists of two independent and redundant trains that provide cooling to the control room and control room area. Each train consists of a chiller package, chilled water pump, and air handling units with cooling coils. Chilled water is passed through the cooling coils of the air handling unit to cool the air. Electric duct heaters are then used to control the supply air temperature.

The CRACWS provides both normal and emergency cooling to the control room and control room area. A single train will provide the required temperature control to maintain the control room approximately 740F. The CRACWS operation in maintaining the control room temperature is discussed in the UFSAR, Section 9.4 (Ref. 1).

APPLICABLE The design basis of the CRACWS is to maintain the control room SAFETY ANALYSES temperature for 30 days of continuous occupancy.

The CRACWS components are arranged in redundant, safety related trains. During emergency operation, the CRACWS maintains the temperature between 72 0F and 850F. A single active failure of a component of the CRACWS, with a loss of offsite power, does not impair the ability of the system to perform its design function. Redundant detectors and controls are provided for control room temperature control.

The CRACWS is designed in accordance with Seismic Category I requirements. The CRACWS is capable of removing sensible and latent heat loads from the control room, which include consideration of equipment heat loads and personnel occupancy requirements, to ensure equipment OPERABILITY.

The CRACWS satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36 (Ref. 2).

Catawba Units 1 and 2

.B 3.7. 11 -1 Revision No. 3

CRACWS B 3.7.11 BASES LCO Two independent and redundant trains of the CRACWS are required to be OPERABLE to ensure that at least one is available, assuming a single failure disabling the other train. Total system failure could result in the equipment operating temperature exceeding limits in the event of an accident.

The CRACWS is considered to be OPERABLE when the individual components necessary to maintain the control room temperature are OPERABLE in both trains. These components include a chiller package, chilled water pump, and air handling unit. In addition, the CRACWS must be OPERABLE to the extent that air circulation can be maintained.

The CRACWS is shared between the two units. The system must be OPERABLE for each unit when that unit is in the MODE of Applicability.

Additionally, both normal and emergency power must also be OPERABLE because the system is shared. A shutdown unit supplying its associated emergency power source (1EMXG/2EMXH) cannot be credited for OPERABILITY of components supporting the operating unit.

If a CRACWS component becomes inoperable, or normal or emergency power to a CRACWS component becomes inoperable, then the Required Actions of this LCO must be entered independently for each unit that is in the MODE of applicability of the LCO.

APPLICABILITY In MODES 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and during movement of recently

.irradiated fuel assemblies, the CRACWS must be OPERABLE to ensure that the control room temperature will not exceed equipment operational requirements following a design basis accident. The CRACWS is only required to be OPERABLE during fuel handling involving handling recently irradiated fuel (i.e., fuel that has occupied part of a critical reactor core within the previous 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />) due to radioactive decay.

ACTIONS A.1 With one CRACWS train inoperable, action must be taken to restore OPERABLE status within 30 days. In this Condition, the remaining OPERABLE CRACWS train is adequate to maintain the control room temperature within limits. However, the overall reliability is reduced because a single failure in the OPERABLE CRACWS train could result in loss of CRACWS function. The 30 day Completion Time is based on the low probability of an event, the consideration that the remaining train can provide the required protection, and that alternate safety or nonsafety related cooling means are available.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.11-2 Revision No. 3

CRACWS B 3.7.11 BASES ACTIONS (continued)

B.1 and B.2 In MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, if the inoperable CRACWS train cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the required Completion Time, the unit must be placed in a MODE that minimizes the risk. To achieve this status, the unit must be placed in at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />, and in MODE 5 within 36 hours4.166667e-4 days <br />0.01 hours <br />5.952381e-5 weeks <br />1.3698e-5 months <br />. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.

C.1 and C.2 In MODE 5 or 6, or during movement of recently irradiated fuel, if the inoperable CRACWS train cannot be restored to OPERABLE sta.h,,s within the required Completion Time, the OPERABLE CRACWS train must be placed in operation immediately. This action ensures that the remaining train is OPERABLE, and that active failures will be readily detected.

An alternative to Required Action C. 1 is to immediately suspend activities that present a potential for releasing radioactivity. This places the unit in a condition that minimizes accident risk. This does not preclude the movement of fuel to a safe position.

p-l-In MODE 5 or 6, or during movement of recently irradiated fuel assemblies, with two CRACWS trains inoperable, action must be taken immediately to suspend activities that could result in a release of radioactivity. This places the unit in a condition that minimizes risk. This does not preclude the movement of fuel to a safe position.

E.1 If both CRACWS trains are inoperable in MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, the.ontrol room CRACWS may not be capable of performing its intended function.

Therefore, LCO 3.0.3 must be entered immediately.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.11-3 Revision No. 3

CRACWS B 3.7.11 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.7.11.1 REQUIREMENTS This SR verifies that the heat removal capability of the system is sufficient to maintain the temperature in the control room at or below 901F. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

REFERENCES

1.

UFSAR, Section 9.4.

2.

10 CFR 50.36, Technical Specifications, (c)(2)(ii).

3.

10 CFR 50.67, Accident source term.

4.

Regulatory Guide 1.183, Revision 0.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.11-4 Revision No. 3

ABFVES B 3.7.12 B 3.7 PLANT SYSTEMS B 3.7.12 Auxiliary Building Filtered Ventilation Exhaust System (ABFVES)

BASES BACKGROUND The ABFVES normally filters air exhausted from all potentially contaminated areas of the auxiliary building, which includes the Emergency Core Cooling System (ECCS) pump rooms and non safety portions of the auxiliary building. The ABFVES, in conjunction with other normally operating systems, also provides ventilation for these areas of the auxiliary building.

The ABFVES consists of two independent and redundant trains. Each train consists of a heater demister section and a filter unit section. The heater demister section consists of a prefilter/moisture separator (to remove entrained water droplets) and an electric heater (to reduce the relative humidity of air entering the filter unit). The filter unit section consists of a prefilter, an upstream HEPA filter, an activated carbon adsorber (for the removal of gaseous activity, principally iodines), a downstream HEPA, and a fan. The downstream HEPA filter is not credited in the accident analysis, but serves to collect carbon fines.

Ductwork, valves or dampers, and instrumentation also form part of the system. Following receipt of a safety injection (SI) signal, the system isolates non safety portions of the ABFVES and exhausts air only from the ECCS pump rooms.

The ABFVES is normally aligned to bypass the system HEPA filters and carbon adsorbers. During emergency operations, the ABFVES dampers are realigned to the filtered position, and fans are started to begin filtration. During emergency operations, the ABFVES dampers are realigned to isolate the non-safety portions of the system and only draw air from the ECCS pump rooms, as well as the Elevation 522 pipe chase, and Elevation 543 and 560 mechanical penetration rooms.

The ABFVES is discussed in the UFSAR, Sections 6.5, 9.4, 14.4, and 15.6 (Refs. 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively) since it may be used for normal, as well as post accident, atmospheric cleanup functions. The heaters are not required for OPERABILITY, since the laboratory test of the carbon is performed at 95% relative humidity, but have been maintained in the system to provide additional margin (Ref. 9).

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.12-1 Revision No. 5

ABFVES B 3.7.12 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES The design basis of the ABFVES is established by the large break LOCA. The system evaluation assumes a constant leak rate of 0.5 gpm in the ECCS pump rooms and a constant leak rate of 0.5 gpm outside the ECCS pump rooms throughout the accident. In such a case, the system limits radioactive release to within the 10 CFR 50.67 (Ref. 6) limits. The analysis of the effects and consequences of a large break LOCA is presented in Reference 4.

The ABFVES satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36 (Ref. 7).

LCO Two independent and redundant trains of the ABFVES are required to be OPERABLE to ensure that at least one is available, assuming that a single failure disables the other train coincident with a loss of offsite power. Total system failure could result in the atmospheric release from the ECCS pump rooms exceeding 10 CFR 50.67 limits in the event of a Design Basis Accident (DBA).

ABFVES is considered OPERABLE when the individual components necessary to maintain the ECCS pump rooms filtration are OPERABLE in both trains.

An ABFVES train is considered OPERABLE when its associated:

a.

Fan is OPERABLE;

b.

HEPA filters and carbon adsorbers are capable of performing their filtration functions; and

c.

Ductwork, valves, and dampers are OPERABLE and air circulation can be maintained.

The ABFVES fans power supply is provided by buses which are shared between the two units. A shutdown unit supplying its associated emergency power source (1 EMXG/2EMXH) cannot be credited for OPERABILITY of components supporting the operating unit. If normal or emergency power to the ABFVES becomes inoperable, then the Required Actions of this LCO must be entered independently for each unit that is in the MODE of applicability of the LCO.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.12-2 ReVision No. 5

ABFVES B 3.7.12 BASES LCO (continued)

The LCO is modified by a Note allowing the ECCS pump rooms pressure boundary to be opened intermittently under administrative controls. For entry and exit through doors, the administrative control of the opening is performed by the person(s) entering or exiting the area. For other openings, these controls consist of stationing a dedicated individual at the opening who is in continuous communication with the control room. This individual will have a method to rapidly close the opening when a need for ECCS pump rooms pressure boundary isolation is indicated.

APPLICABILITY In MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4, the ABFVES is required to be OPERABLE consistent with the OPERABILITY requirements of the ECCS.

In MODE 5 or 6, the ABFVES is not required to be OPERABLE since the ECCS is not required to be OPERABLE.

ACTIONS A. 1 With ort ABFVFS train inoperable, action must be taken-to restore OPERABLE status within 7 days. During this time, the remaining OPERABLE train is adequate to perform the ABFVES function.

The 7 day Completion Time is appropriate because the risk contribution is less than that for the ECCS (72 hour8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> Completion Time), and this system is not a direct support system for the ECCS. The 7 day Completion Time is based on the low probability of a DBA occurring during this time period, and ability of the remaining train to provide the required capability.

Concurrent failure of two ABFVES trains would result in the loss of functional capability; therefore, LCO 3.0.3 must be entered immediately.

B. 1 If the ECCS pump rooms pressure boundary is inoperable such that the ABFVES trains cannot establish or maintain the required pressure, action must be taken to restore an OPERABLE ECCS pump rooms pressure boundary within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />. During the period that the ECCS pump rooms pressure boundary is inoperable, appropriate compensatory ra.ures (consistent with the intent, as applicable, of GDC 19, 60, 64, and 10 CFR 50.67) should be utilized to protect plant personnel from potential Catawba Units 1 and 2 R 57.12-3 Revision No. 5

ABFVES B. 3.7.12 BASES ACTIONS (continued) hazards such as radioactive contamination, toxic chemicals, smoke, temperature and relative humidity, and physical security. Preplanned measures should be available to address these concerns for intentional and unintentional entry into the condition. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time is reasonable based on the low probability of a DBA occurring during this time period and the use of compensatory measures. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time is a typically reasonable time to diagnose, plan and possibly repair, and test most problems with the ECCS pump rooms pressure boundary.

C.1 and C.2 If the ABFVES train or ECCS pump rooms pressure boundary cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the associated Completion Time, the unit must be placed in a MODE in which the LCO does not apply. To achieve this status, the unit must be placed in at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />, and in MODE 5 within 36 hours4.166667e-4 days <br />0.01 hours <br />5.952381e-5 weeks <br />1.3698e-5 months <br />. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.

D.1 and D.2 With one or more ABFVES heaters inoperable, the heater must be restored to OPERABLE status within 7 days. Alternatively, a report must be initiated per Specification 5.6.6, which details the reason for the heater's inoperability and the corrective action required to return the heater to OPERABLE status.

The heaters do not affect OPERABILITY of the ABFVES filter trains because carbon adsorber efficiency testing is performed at 30 0C and 95% relative humidity. The accident analysis shows that site boundary radiation doses are within 10 CFR 50.67 limits during a DBA LOCA under these conditions.

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.7.12.1 REQUIREMENTS Systems should be checked periodically to ensure that they function properly. As the environment and normal operating conditions on this system are not severe, testing each train once a month provides an adequate check on this system. Monthly heater operations dry out any moisture that may have accumulated in the carbon from humidity in the ambient air. Systems with heaters must be operated from the control room >_ 10 continuous hours with flow through the HEPA filters and Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.12-4 Revision No. 5

ABFVES B 3.7.12 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued) carbon adsorbers and with the heaters energized. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

SR 3.7.12.2 This SR verifies that the required ABFVES testing is performed in accordance with the Ventilation Filter Testing Program (VFTP). The ABFVES filter tests are in accordance with Reference 5. The VFTP includes testing HEPA filter performance, carbon adsorbers efficiency, system flow rate, and the physical properties of the activated carbon (general use and following specific operations). The system flow rate determination and in-place testing of the filter unit components is performed in the normal operating alignment with both trains in operation.

Flow through each filter unit in this alignment is approximately 30,000 cfm. The normal operating alignment has been chosen to minimize normal radiological protection concerns that occur when the system is operated in an abnormal alignment for an extended period of time.

Operation of the system in other alignments may alter flow rates to the extent that the 30,000 cfm +10% specified in Technical Specification 5.5.11 will not be met. Flow rates outside the specified band under these operating alignments will not require the system to be considered inoperable.

Certain postulated failures and post accident recovery operational alignments may result in post accident system operation with only one train of ABFVES in a "normal" alignment. Under these conditions system flow rate is expected to increase above the normal flow band specified in Technical Specification 5.5.11. An analysis has been performed which conservatively predicts the maximum flow rate under these conditions is approximately 37,000 cfm. 37,000 cfm corresponds to a face velocity of approximately 48 ft/min that is significantly more than the normal 40 ft/min velocity specified in ASTM D3803-1989 (Ref. 10). Therefore, the laboratory test of the carbon penetration is performed in accordance with ASTM D3803-1989 and Generic Letter 99-02 at a face velocity of 48 ft/min. These test results are to be adjusted for a 2.27 inch bed using the methodology presented in ASTM D3803-1989 prior to comparing them to the Technical Specification 5.5.11 limit. Specific test Frequencies and additional information are discussed in detail in the VFTP.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.12-5 Revision No. 5

ABFVES B 3.7.12 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

SR 3.7.12.3 This SR verifies that each ABFVES train starts and operates with flow through the HEPA filters and carbon adsorbers on an actual or simulated actuation signal. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

SR 3.7.12.4 This SR verifies the pressure boundary integrity of the ECCS pump rooms. The following rooms are considered to be ECCS pump rooms (with respect to the ABFVES): centrifugal charging pump rooms, safety injection pump rooms, residual heat removal pump rooms, and the containment spray pump rooms. Although the containment spray system is not normally considered an ECCS system, it is included in this ventilation boundary because of its accident mitigation function which requires the pumping of post accident containment sump fluid. The Elevation 522 pipe chase area is also maintained at a negative pressure by the ABFVES. Since the Elevation 543 and 560 mechanical penetration rooms communicate directly with the Elevation 522 pipe chase area, these penetration rooms are also maintained at a negative pressure by the ABFVES. The ability of the system to maintain the ECCS pump rooms at a negative pressure, with respect to potentially unfiltered adjacent areas, is periodically tested to verify proper functioning of the ABFVES. Upon receipt of a safety injection signal to initiate LOCA operation, the ABFVES is designed to maintain a slight negative pressure in the ECCS pump rooms, with respect to adjacent areas, to prevent unfiltered LEAKAGE. The ABFVES will continue to operate in this mode until the safety injection signal is reset. The Surveillance Frequency is based on operating experience, equipment reliability, and plant risk and is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.12-6 Revision No. 5

ABFVES B 37.12 BASES REFERENCES

1.

UFSAR, Section 6.5.

2.

UFSAR, Section 9.4.

3.

UFSAR, Section 14.4.

4.

UFSAR, Section 15.6.

5.

Regulatory Guide 1.52 (Rev. 2).

6.

10 CFR 50.67.

7.

10 CFR 50.36, Technical Specifications, (c)(2)(ii).

8.

Not used.

9.

Catawba Nuclear Station License Amendments 90/84 for Units 1/2, August 23, 1991.

10.

ASTM D3803-1989.

Revision No. 5 Catawba Units 1 and 2 B 3.7.12-7